JP7371066B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, on which games can be played.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that display operation promotion images accompanied by effects have been proposed.

JP2020-44181

There was room for improvement in the display of operation promotion images.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to improve the interest in operation promotion displays.

The gaming machine of this means is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player;
Display means (image display device 5),
The operation means includes an operation part (operation effective part) that can be operated by the player and a non-operation part (operation ineffective part) that cannot be operated by the player,
The performance control means is
A suggestion effect (SP reach) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state using a specific character (ally character CA1) can be executed on the display means,
When the suggestive effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) that displays an image related to the operation means can be executed;
The operation-related performances include a first operation-related performance (first button performance), and a second operation-related performance (second button performance) that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related performance; There is,
The performance control means is
In the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is a first angle of the operation means, which is an angle when the operation means is viewed from the front side and is an angle at which the entire operation means can be visually recognized. (The basic angle of looking down on the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board)) The first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed. can be,
In the second operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at a second angle different from the first angle (a second angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right). a second display (second operation preview display of the second aspect); and a third display (second operation promotion display) that is an image that displays the operating means at the first angle and is different from the first display. display) and can display
In the first display, the specific character is not displayed (the ally character CA1 is not displayed in the first operation promotion display),
In the second display, the specific character is displayed on an image related to the operation part among the images related to the operation means (ally character CA1 is displayed in the operation effective part of the second operation preview display of the second aspect) ),
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (the first display). When the one-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the third display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the operation of the operation means. When the 2-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the first operation-related performance that has a lower rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the second operation-related performance, the image related to the operating means is displayed by displaying the operating means at one type of angle. On the other hand, in the second operation-related presentation, which is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operating means is an image in which the operating means is displayed from multiple types of angles. By doing so, it is possible to create a more special feeling in the second operation-related performance than in the first operation-related performance, and it is possible to improve the interest in the suggestion performance in which the operation-related performance is executed. Furthermore, by displaying a specific character in an image related to the operation unit among images related to the operating means when the second operation-related effect is executed, the second operation-related effect is more effective than the first operation-related effect. It is possible to give a special feeling to the system, and to improve the interest of the suggestive performance in which the operation-related performance is performed.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of the present invention, or may have structures other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. It is a figure showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart which shows starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type table in the feature section 03TM. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table, and (3), (4), and (5) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a display control section. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a drawing method of three-dimensional image processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after SP reach development. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production corresponding to the first half part of SP reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance corresponding to the second half first part of SP reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance corresponding to the second half part of SP reach. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a normal button effect executed in the second half of SP reach. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a normal button effect executed in the second half of SP reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance corresponding to the second half third part of SP reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first chance up performance and a second chance up performance executed in the second half part of SP reach. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the third chance up production performed in the second half second part of SP reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fourth chance up production performed in the second half part of SP reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start in 1st Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a table referred to in the variation start effect determination process in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during a jackpot. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to perform an image retention series effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode in the case where a 3R jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode in the case where a 10R jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode in the case where a 10R jackpot occurs. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in a second embodiment. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of an attacker lamp, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a light emission mode of the attacker lamp. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an attacker lamp light emission performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an attacker lamp light emission performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an attacker lamp light emission performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an attacker lamp light emission performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an attacker lamp holding continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an over winning performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding an attacker lamp V winning notification performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of an effect mode regarding attacker lamp control during power outage. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to attacker lamp control when performing a chance-up performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to attacker lamp control when performing a chance-up performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a table referred to in the effect determination process at the start of variation in the third embodiment. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance related to the first button performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a first button performance. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance related to the second button performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a second button performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing wavelengths of display colors.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electroluminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the time-saving state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becoming a "jackpot". However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the time saving state may be controlled based on an opportunity other than the display result of the variable display of the special symbols becoming a "jackpot".

For example, a "time saving result" may be provided as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol. When a missed symbol with a time saver is stopped and displayed, the time saver control is controlled to a time saver state B in which the time saver control is performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, a chance time with the number of time savers being 7 times). In addition, when the fluctuation is performed 500 times without being controlled to hit the jackpot in a low probability state, the time saving control is controlled to a time saving state C in which the time saving control is performed a second predetermined number of times (for example, a play time with a time saving number of 99 times). . However, even if after the end of the time saving state C, the fluctuation is performed again 500 times without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, the time saving state C will not be controlled again based on this.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of performance, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various performances (performances that notify the progress of the game or make the game more exciting) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, An I/O (Input/Output port) 105 is provided.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be explained. Regarding the feature section 152F, a technique aimed at a pachinko gaming machine in which setting means can set setting values having different advantages for players, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, will be described below. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player as the setting value of the probability of winning a jackpot. .

First, the setting values will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the setting value by a setting change operation performed by a person on the gaming parlor side (such as a clerk at the gaming parlor) using an operating means such as a predetermined switch. It is said to be composed of

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows changing the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, a setting change process is executed that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting values are, for example, comprised of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, and the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage is in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. It increases in stages. It should be noted that the set value may be set in multiple stages, and is not limited to six stages. In this way, as the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed, the ball release rate (number of balls played per unit time (number of prize balls)) will change, so changing the setting value will change the ball release rate. It can also be said that it is something to do.

For example, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Among the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

Further, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting the setting value 1 to setting value 6, similarly to the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similar to the jackpot winning probability. The selection probability of the variable pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similarly to the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic part 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is In some cases, a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled (win) is executed is stored. Specifically, the pending connection means that among the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred, there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred Refers to consecutive wins within the range of pending information in which the next winning occurs consecutively within the range of . In addition, in the case of a small win, it becomes a jackpot via a small win based on the occurrence of a V winning, so it can be said that the pending information of a small win is the pending storage information of a win that will become a jackpot in the future. When such a pending series is executed, a notification effect that notifies that the series is on hold may be executed.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions of the same components as in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be described.

In the game area where the game ball that has been hit can flow down, the first path of the flow paths along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game ball is flown down. A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A in which a first starting winning opening is formed is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning hole.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the gaming area can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B has a second starting prize opening into which game balls can be won. In addition, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 21 is installed inside the passage gate 41, a second starting opening switch 22B is installed inside the second starting winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87 is installed. Inside, a V winning switch 87a, a V judgment winning switch 15a, and a V judgment discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass through). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs.

The V judgment prize winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually check the game ball passing through the inside. The V judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game ball to pass in the front and back direction, and walls on both sides (the front side and the back side) of the passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right direction. A guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, when a small hit occurs, a signal is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 open periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second). By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of time when the opening is open. The path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball so as to protrude alternately on both sides of the wall, so that when hitting right-handed, , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly is formed in the passage above the operation opening on the upper part of the V judgment winning device 87.

In the small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Opening control is executed. In the V judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guideway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), a V-winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning region where the game ball that enters from the operating port can win. Further, a ramp is provided for guiding all of the game balls entering from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball that has entered from the V winning opening downward.

A plate-shaped opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided at the top end of the winning hole (V winning hole) of the V winning area 870. There is. The opening/closing member is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning hole is opened depending on the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is in a state where it can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. The ball is placed in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small winning game state in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, one game ball is When entering the V winning area 870 and winning a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 from then on will be inside the winning ball area. will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V judgment winning switch 87a and the V judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V judgment winning device 87, which is opened in the small winning game state, closes its operating port and the game ball enters. considered to be an impossible situation. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the gaming balls that have passed through the merged discharge passage and entered the V judgment winning device 87 are placed in a predetermined position inside the game board 2. It is discharged into the discharge channel. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect the game balls to be discharged, and all the game balls to be discharged are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , the conditions for generating a jackpot are satisfied, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The winning of a game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as mentioned above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 game balls can be collected on average without requiring any special operation. The structure and control design are such that the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, the game ball is always (100%) in the V winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-hitting promotion notification that instructs the player to hit the right-hand ball is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. Ru.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87, and unless the player hits the ball left-handed, the player must hit right-handed. In this case, the game ball will definitely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the V judgment winning device 87 was provided with a structure for decelerating the game ball. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operating port that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game balls hit into the left gaming area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are distributed into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the gaming area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nails.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a big winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the bottom by a solenoid, and the big winning opening appears ( open). A count switch 23 is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 to detect the game ball that has entered. A winning route is set to the special variable winning ball device 7 using a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can enter the grand prize opening only when the game ball is hit into the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that it may be arranged so that a prize can be won in the big winning hole regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which the special variable winning ball device 7 provided with the big winning hole and the V judgment winning device 87 for determining a V winning are different devices, but such a form However, the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning opening and the V judgment winning device 87 for determining a V winning may be a common device.

For example, a V judgment winning device 87 for determining a V winning may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening. In this case, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole enters the V judgment winning device 87 as it is.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Occurs in When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is drawn and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the second starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

A jackpot also occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 while the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small winning gaming state. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and being detected by the V winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value imparting, and a jackpot can occur on the condition of a V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a gaming state in which the operating port is opened is called a "small winning gaming state." Then, in the small hit game state, a jackpot that occurs based on the game ball winning a V prize is called a "jackpot via a small win." On the other hand, a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as "jackpot by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player as a predetermined value imparting, and a repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeated continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning hole is open) is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the fulfillment of the opening termination condition (that is, the occurrence of winning balls). Then, when the release end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed when the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, when the game ball After passing (including winning) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole as the starting winning area, the start condition for the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the establishment of a state in which a jackpot game is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed, and when a variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, a display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed. Note that the game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning opening (winning a prize). It is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means to finally stop and display the symbol (an example of identification information) (determined display).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the starting conditions have not yet been met even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, if the game ball has not yet started within the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information regarding variable displays for which conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "suspended storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been stored. Pending memory is also called starting memory or starting winnings memory.

Regarding the first special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the first pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole. Regarding the second special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the second pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole. If a jackpot occurs in a state where such first pending memory or second pending memory exists, the pending memory that existed before the jackpot occurrence will be maintained as it is, and the variable display will be displayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. used for.

When a second starting prize enters the second starting winning hole, even if there is a pending memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning will be executed with priority. Ru. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "special 2 priority consumption").

In addition, although the above-mentioned embodiment showed the example in which special 2 priority digestion is executed, it is not limited to such a form, and special 2 priority digestion does not have to be executed.

For example, (A) the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed with priority over the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "special 1 priority consumption"), (B) The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "special 1 special 2 simultaneous consumption").

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is a second reserve consisting of four displays that display the number of valid winning balls that entered the second starting winning hole, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, a first reservation display 25A is provided which is made up of four indicators that display the effective number of winning balls that have entered the first starting prize opening, that is, the number of first reservation memories. . The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game ball in two ways: ``left-handed'' aiming at the left playing area, and ``right-handed hitting'' aiming at the right playing area. The game state and performance state are controlled so that a rich variety of games can be enjoyed. Below, the flow of the game after the player starts playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

When a player takes a seat at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening by hitting the ball to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to the special symbol), the user switches from left-handed batting to right-handed batting and plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that is released. . After the jackpot game state ends, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to play the game by hitting right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the player aims at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball with the right hand. During the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state ends, if the time saving state described later is reached, the player continues playing the game by hitting right. After the jackpot game is over, if the time saving state has been reached, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the time saving state will start. Further, during the time saving state, a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hitting promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball switches from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting and enters the first starting prize opening. Play the game as follows. In addition, if the time saving state does not occur, a left-handed playing promotion notification (also called left-handed playing notification) is made to be performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game. It's okay.

During the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot due to a special symbol), the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting the right hand. In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the display result becomes a small hit display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 will be opened in the small winning gaming state, so the V judgment will be made while hitting the right hand. Aim for the winning device 87 and play the game. At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state is started. In addition, when controlled to a small winning gaming state, a specific timing (depending on the gaming situation, the start timing of the small winning display that is executed before the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small winning) , or at a predetermined timing before the small win display is executed.), a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning gaming state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small hit occurs. When a V winning prize occurs, a V winning notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V winning prize has occurred. Further, when the small winning gaming state ends, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 is released in the jackpot game state, so the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning gaming state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, the jackpot will occur. does not occur. In this way, when a V winning does not occur during the small winning game state, a V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, at the end of the small winning gaming state, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small winning game state ends, while the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable prize winning ball device 6B while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the player switches from right-handed to left-handed and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening. At the end of the time saving state, time saving end notification to notify that the time saving has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and left-handed playing promotion notification to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each type of winning, the conditions for generating a jackpot, the control state (gaming state) after the jackpot, the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4 )R Time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is released.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. It will be done. 16(15)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9(8)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. 5(4)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). For the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 16 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 15 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type. Via small hit 9 (8) R Time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) with the condition of V winning. It is. Via small hit 5 (4) R Time-saving jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 4 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type.

Symbol 4R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. Two end states are set: The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically the time-saving state (including electric support state) continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

After a jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the end condition is that the second special symbol is displayed 7 times, and the total number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11. Two end states are set: The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is such that the jackpot occurs immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol starts due to the reserved memory based on the first starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state, the second special symbol 7 is likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the display of changes in the number of times of changes can be executed reliably. By doing this, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantages, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are compared to the first route. and the second route, and in the low base state which is the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and small In other states such as a winning game state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second path.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 8-3, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: This is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and whether or not to win a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Jackpot type (type, symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine (any type of R time-saving jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the jackpots in the specific gaming state include symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and small hit. It includes multiple types of via 5(4)R time-saving jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a hit (random R), or when a determination is made as a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a jackpot via a small hit, if a V-win does not occur, the determined jackpot will be invalidated. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the type of small win is determined, the small win symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining small winning symbols.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3), This fluctuation pattern is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve a reach, and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves a reach.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-4(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot and a small hit for the second special symbol, and a jackpot determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R are set. This is the table where The upper part of FIG. 8-4(B) is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part of FIG. 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.The "probability" shown in the lower part of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of winning a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. Extract the count value (random R). For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the first special symbol. decided on. Regarding the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the second special symbol. decided on. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is matched with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

FIGS. 8-4(C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 8-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 8-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

The first special jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(C) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "Symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" and "Symbol 4R time-saving jackpot". A jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of these is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 is set.

In addition, as shown in Figures 8-4(C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The jackpot type determination table via small hit in Figure 8-4 (E) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and " Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" are set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot type determination table via small hit are the 1st small hit (16 (15) R time-saving jackpot), the 2nd small hit (9 (8) R time-saving jackpot) This is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the 3rd small win (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalidated if a V win does not occur in the small win gaming state.

FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the relationship between specific command data for the production control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command is shown. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, various performance control commands are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 will be explained. Command 80XX(H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX(H), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance display device to start a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate display results including loss display results, jackpot display results for each jackpot type, small win type, and small win display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start varying display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are win start designation commands that designate the start of a jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX(H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big winning hole, which indicates that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a designation command after the opening of the big winning hole which indicates the opening (closure) of the big winning hole of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are win end designation commands that designate the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command A402 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies the first pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first pending storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second pending storage number designation command that specifies the second pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second pending storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when subtracting the number of pending memories, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a pending memory number designation command that specifies the number of pending memories after subtraction; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories, a pending storage number subtraction designation command may be used to specify that the number of pending memories is to be subtracted by one.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to end the first small winning. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to end the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to end the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) has been detected entering the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first reservation storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured in the first pending storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second pending storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second pending storage buffer. The second pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saves them in a storage area in the first holding storage buffer. Execute the process to (storage). Specifically, these random numerical values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first holding storage buffer based on the winning in the first starting winning opening. In addition, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second holding storage buffer. Execute the process to save (storage) to. Specifically, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second holding storage buffer based on the winning in the second starting winning opening.

Storing information regarding the starting winnings in the pending storage buffer in this manner may be referred to as "being stored pending storage." In addition, the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the reservation memory buffer in advance, but are extracted at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It may be extracted.

FIG. 8-7 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process in S101. In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not in the on state, the process moves to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending memory for counting the number of first pending memories). It is confirmed whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221.

If the first pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first pending memory counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected first special symbol's starting winning is subsequently executed at the starting winning (S1215).

In this embodiment, after a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending storage information, the start conditions for the variable display are set. If established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal processing (S110), the variable display result is determined for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is to be started based on the relevant pending storage information. The determination as to whether or not to be displayed as a jackpot display result and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), the fluctuation pattern (including the determination of the fluctuation pattern type) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination value and the fluctuation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random values described above. Based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display starts based on the starting winnings in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, specifically, the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole. Or, at the timing when a starting prize is won in the second starting prize opening (the timing at which the pending memory information is stored), the pending memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is pre-read, and based on the pre-read pending memory information. In this way, the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of jackpot, and the type of fluctuation pattern are performed in advance by a jackpot set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. A winning presentation process is executed to pre-read and determine based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the fluctuating display result in advance before the fluctuating display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the start winning time, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that foretells that there will be a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot).

Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1216), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first starting prize designation command to the production control CPU 120 (S1218), and sets the value of the first pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the first pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command, and the A set of four commands, including the first pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending memory for counting the number of second pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is immediately terminated.

If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second pending memory counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 regarding the starting winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1226), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second starting prize designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and sets the value of the second pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the second pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a starting prize to the second starting winning hole occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, A set of four commands, including the second pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, processing for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the processing ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending memory data in the second pending memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A will be displayed depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A based on the pending memory data stored in the first pending memory buffer. be exposed. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B based on the pending memory data stored in the second pending memory buffer. will be held.

Through the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data in the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. Store it in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second pending storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. Additionally, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of reserved memories indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (S59 ). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, data indicating "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first starting winning hole, that is, "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first special symbol. , or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed targeting the second starting prize opening, that is, data indicating "second" indicating executing the process targeting the second special symbol. , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the same can be used for both the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting port switch passing process or S1224 of the starting port switch passing process and stored in the pending storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small hit determination value with a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or small hit. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (A), the second special symbol will match any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (B). If it matches the judgment value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to make it a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. .

If it is determined in S61 that it is a jackpot (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (D) (S74). , proceed to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. It is determined (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By checking whether or not there is, it is checked whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (it is a variable display of the first special symbol), the process advances to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (fluctuating display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in Figure 8-4 (B) Using the determination table, a small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values (S77). That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small hit. do. If it is determined to be a small win (S77Y), a small win flag indicating that it is a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (E) (S79), and select the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value matching is determined as the jackpot type via small hit (S80). Then, the process moves to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process moves to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small winning gaming state. If this does not occur, the jackpot will not occur and there will be invalid data, which will be provisionally set.

In S82, a stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, one of "1", "5", and "9", which is a small winning symbol according to the small winning type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol. do. If the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot symbol according to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 8-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (S118). In the small winning opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small winning, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small winning start designation command indicating that a small winning game state is started to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judgment winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the small winning open state as the condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is set to "10", and settings are made to count down the number of V winning prizes. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit release control timer by -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is checked whether the count value of the V judgment winnings counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning balls counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counted value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is "0" in S430, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is checked whether the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is brought into the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 in accordance with the timed value of the small win release control timer based on the opening mode of the small win. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not a V winning that occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 which is in an open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 from the V winning opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it means that a V winning prize is detected, and a V winning flag that is set when a V winning prize is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the production control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning hole in the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V-win, the V-winning opening in the V-winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not in the on state in S434, it is the time when the V winning prize is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15a is in the on state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process advances to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V judgment winning ball counter set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9 is down-counted by "-1" (S439), and a V judgment winning ball detection designation command is sent. The following processing is performed (S440). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the judgment winning device 87 It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is "0" in S431, it is the time when the small winning opening end condition is satisfied because the small winning V winning number reaches the upper limit value, and, When the small win release control timer times out in S432, the small win release control is completed and the small win release end condition is satisfied. At these times, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small win release control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control in the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to a specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (S442). The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S120) (S443), and the process ends. As a result, time measurement for a specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, is started. In addition, by setting the specific period that is the V winning prize validity period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize area later than the normal time for some reason, the game ball can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if someone attempts to enter the V winning area illegally, only that period will be detected, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning post-end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

If the V winning valid period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is already detected has been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that a V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that a V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing ends. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

When the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small winning end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small winning game state, if you play right-handed in accordance with the right-handed hitting promotion notification described later, you can make the game ball enter the V judgment winning device 87 with approximately 100% probability, and you will receive a V judgment winning prize. Based on the fact that the game ball that enters the device 87 always makes a V win in the V win area 870, the V win flag is set with approximately 100% probability (S435 in FIG. 8-10). A jackpot flag is set and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning. is formally stored (S450). Then, the time saving flag that was set at that point is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, jackpot start 4 designation command, or jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state has started. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Also, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval. Open pattern data indicating the opening mode such as time (big winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Among such data, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

[Explanation regarding feature 03TM]
[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. The jackpot type table shows, for each type of jackpot, jackpot generation conditions, control status (gaming status) after the jackpot, number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, as jackpot types, symbol 10R time-saving jackpot, symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, small hit via 10(9)R time-saving jackpot, and small hit via 3(2)R time-saving jackpot are provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. The jackpot via small hit includes "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot.

In this example, the small win that is linked so that it can become a "10(9)R time-saving jackpot" is called the "first small win." A small win that is linked so that it can become a "3(2)R time-saving jackpot" is called a "second small win."

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" which occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" will be appropriately referred to as "symbol 10R jackpot", and the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" will be appropriately called "symbol 3R jackpot".

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. Hereinafter, "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "10 (9) time-saving jackpot via small hit" will be appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot."

The symbol 10R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). The symbol 3R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened three times (3R). For the 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 9 times (9R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 10 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 9 times, and the player has the same jackpot type as the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel that. Via Small Hit 3 (2) R Time-saving Jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened twice (2R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 3 rounds, but the number of times the jackpot is actually opened is 2 times, and the player has to enter the same jackpot type as the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel that.

Symbol 3R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. (not shown) are set. The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of a symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

In addition, after the jackpot of symbol 10R time-saving jackpot, 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, the end condition is that the second special symbol is displayed 7 times. Two end states are set: and an end condition (not shown) that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the ending condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is that for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, immediately after the start of the time-saving state, the second special symbol It is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display start condition is met by the suspended memory based on the first starting winning that can be stored at a maximum of 4 before the jackpot game state. This is to ensure that the display of the seven variations of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a big hit, can be displayed.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a special state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment prize winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so if the game ball flows down the second route, it is better to enter the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantageousness, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are the first. It is provided in the route and the second route, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and In other states such as a small winning gaming state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route, and from other viewpoints, the first route is used as the gaming medium in the normal state. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of MR3, a random number MR4 for determining a general figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-2, the present invention is not limited to this. The range from MR5 to MR5 may vary depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns serving as modes are stored.

[Display result judgment table]
FIGS. 9-3 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9-3 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[first special symbol] display result determination table"). The display result determination table [for the first special symbol] is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-3 (1) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.
In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/199.

FIG. 9-3 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[second special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for making a jackpot determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol, and includes a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number MR1, and a small hit determination. This is a table in which values are set. In FIG. 9-3 (2), the upper part is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (proportion) of a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/199. Further, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing. The count value (random value MR1) is extracted. For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. For the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value does not match any of the small hit judgment values. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIGS. 9-3 (3), (4), and (5) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 9-3 (3) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 9-3 (4) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol. Figure 9-3 (5) is a small hit via small hit jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the small hit via small hit when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. .

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "[first special symbol] jackpot type determination table") in FIG. 9-3 (3) includes a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. A numerical value to be compared with the value, and a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is set.

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (3) also shows the number of times the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot". "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control count of 7 times, and "pattern 3R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control count of 1 time.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], out of the range of determination values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 8 are assigned to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (3%). , 9 to 299 are assigned to "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" (97%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 9-3 (4) (hereinafter referred to as the “[second special symbol] jackpot type determination table”) includes the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. A jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" is set as a numerical value to be compared with the value.

Further, FIG. 9-3 (4) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the "symbol 10R time saving jackpot". The number of times of time-saving control for "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" is 7 times.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, out of the range of determination values for MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 299 are assigned to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (100%) .

The jackpot type determination table via small hit for the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as the "[second special symbol] jackpot via small hit type determination table") in Figure 9-3 (5) includes the jackpot type determination table. It is a numerical value that is compared with the random value MR2 of It is set.

In addition, in Figure 9-3 (5), the time-saving control executed after the jackpot corresponds to "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small hit". The number of times is also shown. "10 (9) R time saving jackpot via small win" has a time saving control number of 7 times, and "3(2) R time saving jackpot via small win" has a time saving control number of 7 times.

In this example, in the [2nd special symbol] jackpot type determination table via small hit, out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, from 0 to 149 is "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit". (50%), and 150 to 299 are allocated to "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" (50%).

[Fluctuation pattern judgment]
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether the fluctuation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. This fluctuation pattern is determined.

Here, variation pattern determination in a normal state will be described. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment table includes a [missing] fluctuation pattern judgment table that is used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "loss", and a fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the fluctuation display result is determined to be a "jackpot". A variation pattern determination table [for jackpot] used when it is predetermined to do so is prepared in advance.

[For misses] In the variation pattern judgment table, the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment is used for the variation patterns of "Non-reach miss", "Normal reach miss", and "Super reach miss". A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as the determination value.

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", a predetermined random value is set within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. It is assigned as a judgment value.

<Non-reach out>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", in the "non-reach miss" variation pattern, it is reported that the reach state is not established and the final display result is a "miss".

<Normal reach is off>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "Off", in the "Normal Reach Off" variation pattern, after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "miss", it is notified that the final display result is a "miss".

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is composed of an operation valid part that can accept operations from the player and an operation ineffective part that cannot accept operations from the player. In this example, the effective operation part is a part of the push button 31B that includes the word "PUSH" that can be pushed downward (operation), and the ineffective operation part is provided below the effective operation part. This is the part of the pedestal that cannot be pushed (operated).

<Normal reach jackpot>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "jackpot", in the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "222", "777", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "jackpot", it is announced that the final display result is a "jackpot".

<Super reach miss/jackpot>
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern involving super reach ("super reach missed", "super reach jackpot"), the final The display results are confirmed and stopped.

(Super reach performance (battle performance))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that involve super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach miss" and "super reach jackpot", after the reach state is established, it develops into super reach, and an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. As a result, a super reach performance (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "battle performance") is executed to notify whether or not a "big hit" has been won (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-14).

Here, if the final display result is "lost", an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed.

FIG. 9-4 is a fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state.
As shown in Figure 9-4 (1), in the normal state [for miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are "non-reach miss". 901 to 980 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Normal Reach Off", and 981 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach Off" variation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display period of "Non-reach out" is set to 5 seconds, the variable display period of "Normal reach out" is set to 30 seconds, and the variable display period of "Super reach out" is set to 90 seconds.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-4 (2), in the normal state [for jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 50 are "normal reach jackpot". 51 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach Jackpot" variation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display period of "normal reach jackpot" is set to 45 seconds, and the variable display period of "super reach jackpot" is set to 120 seconds.

As shown in Figure 9-4, when the display result is "miss", the rate of selection of a variation pattern with normal reach (in this example, "normal reach is off") is (980-901+1)/997 = approximately 8%, and the rate at which a variation pattern with super reach (in this example, "super reach is off") is selected is (997-981+1)/997 = approximately 1.7%.

On the other hand, when the display result is a "jackpot", the rate at which a variation pattern with normal reach (in this example, "normal reach jackpot") is selected is (50-1+1)/997 = approximately 5%, The rate at which a variation pattern involving super reach (in this example, "super reach jackpot") is selected is approximately 94% (997-51+1)/997.

In this way, when a variation pattern with normal reach (in this example, either "normal reach miss" or "normal reach jackpot") is selected, the percentage of display results that are "miss" is higher (normal reach jackpot). (approximately 5%) < normal reach (approximately 8%)), if a variation pattern with super reach (in this example, either "super reach missed" or "normal reach jackpot") is selected, the displayed result will be Since the percentage of "jackpot" is higher (super reach deviation (approx. 1.7%) < super reach jackpot (approx. 94%)), "super reach" is higher than when a fluctuation pattern with "normal reach" is executed. The expectation of a jackpot is higher when a fluctuation pattern with "reach" is executed.

(Specific configuration of display control unit)
FIG. 9-5 is a configuration diagram showing the display control section 123. The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1500, a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 160, a VRAM (Video RAM) 170, and a drive circuit 180. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 receives necessary information from the CGROM 160 via the CG bus interface 1530 when the display control command input from the production control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from the CGROM 160. The image data is read out and output to the decoder 1550. The CGROM 160 stores image data encoded (data compressed) using the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) method or the like. The decoder 1550 expands the image data read from the CGROM 160 and writes the expanded image data into the material data RAM 1560.

The drawing circuit 1510 uses the image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying one frame of image on the image display device 5, and writes it into the drawing area of the VRAM 170. In this embodiment, an object to be displayed formed by a set of polygons is placed in a virtual three-dimensional space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and rendering processing is performed to display the object on a virtual screen. Frame image data is generated according to the image obtained by projecting the image onto the image. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals based on frame image data within the drawing area to the image display device 5. The image display device 5 performs screen display using, for example, a dot matrix method that drives a large number of pixels.

Note that the VDP 1500 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). Further, the CGROM 160 may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It is sufficient if it is configured using

Next, a display mode of an effect image using objects placed in a virtual three-dimensional space will be described with reference to FIG. 9-6. As shown in Figure 9-6, when drawing an image of an object, the VDP 1500 places the object OB to be displayed, which is formed by a set of polygons, in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. , perform texture mapping on that object. Then, the image display device 5 displays an image obtained by rendering processing of the object subjected to texture mapping. Specifically, assuming that the object is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint EY, an image IM obtained by projecting the object onto a virtual screen SC placed at a predetermined distance from the viewpoint EY is obtained through arithmetic processing. , this image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the drive circuit 180. Note that in this embodiment, the image IM projected onto the virtual screen SC is drawn by perspective projection.

(Specific example of production using objects in virtual three-dimensional space)
FIG. 9-7 is an example of an object placed in a virtual three-dimensional space. In this example, the objects are an ally character CA1 (hereinafter referred to as "ally CA1"), an enemy character CA2 (hereinafter referred to as "enemy CA2"), a tree BG1, and a building BG2 in the virtual three-dimensional space. They are respectively arranged at predetermined coordinates. In the following description, the friend CA1 and the enemy CA2 may be collectively referred to as "characters," and the tree BG1 and building BG2 may be collectively referred to as "background objects."

In the following explanation, the x-axis for defining the coordinates of the virtual three-dimensional space is an axis parallel to the straight line (the direction in which the characters are lined up) connecting the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2. This axis is parallel to the direction in which the trees BG1 are lined up and the direction in which the plurality of buildings BG2 are lined up. The y-axis is an axis perpendicular to the x-axis and parallel to the height direction of each object. Further, the z-axis is an axis perpendicular to the x-axis and the y-axis.

In the example of FIG. 9-7, it is assumed that friendly CA1 is located at coordinates (x1, y1, z1) and enemy CA2 is located at coordinates (x2, y2, z2) in the virtual three-dimensional space. Here, it is assumed that x1<x2, y1<y2, and z1=z2. Furthermore, the tree BG1 and the building BG2 are placed at opposing positions with the character in between.

The camera position shown in FIG. 9-7 corresponds to the viewpoint position when performing object rendering processing. In FIG. 9-7(1), the camera position is set to a position that overlooks both friendly CA1 and enemy CA2 from slightly above, and such a viewpoint is referred to as an outside viewpoint (OE). When the outside viewpoint is set, the virtual screen SC is set between both characters and the outside viewpoint, and the generated image IM includes both the friend CA1 and the enemy CA2 ( (Please refer to the second half of SP Reach, Part 1, which will be described later).

The outside viewpoints include a first outside viewpoint (OE1), a second outside viewpoint (OE2), a third outside viewpoint (OE3), and a fourth outside viewpoint (OE4). By switching the position of the virtual screen SC in response to the switching, it is possible to change the image displayed on the screen, that is, the angle from which the character is viewed (see the second half of SP Reach, the first part described below). .

Note that the example in Figure 9-7 (1) shows an example in which the first outer viewpoint to the fourth outer viewpoint have different coordinates, but some or all of these outer viewpoints may have a common coordinate. It may be coordinates. That is, for the outer viewpoint, only the position of the virtual screen SC (the direction of the line of sight from the viewpoint, the projected position of the object) may be changed without changing the coordinates of the viewpoint.

In FIG. 9-7(2), the camera position is set between friendly CA1 and enemy CA2, and such a viewpoint is called an inside viewpoint (IE). When the inside viewpoint is set, a virtual screen SC is set between one character and the inside viewpoint, or between one background object and the inside viewpoint, and the generated image IM includes one side. characters or no characters are included, and one background object or no background object is included. That is, when the inside viewpoint is set, both characters are not displayed at the same time, and both background objects are not displayed at the same time (see the second half of SP reach described later).

The inside viewpoints include a first inside viewpoint (IE1), a second inside viewpoint (IE2), a third inside viewpoint (IE3), and a fourth inside viewpoint (IE4). By switching the position of the virtual screen SC in response to the switching, the image displayed on the screen, that is, which character is displayed (or which character is not displayed) and which background object It is possible to change whether the background object is displayed (or whether any background object is displayed) (see the second half of SP Reach, which will be described later).

Note that the example in Figure 9-7 (2) shows an example in which the first inner viewpoint to the fourth inner viewpoint have different coordinates, but if some or all of these inner viewpoints have the same coordinates, It may be coordinates. That is, for the inner viewpoint, only the position of the virtual screen SC (the direction of the line of sight from the viewpoint, the projected position of the object) may be changed without changing the coordinates of the viewpoint.

In response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the production control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the center area of the screen, and also starts the variable display of the small symbols in the upper left area of the screen. In addition, in response to the completion of the variable display of the special symbols and the derivation and display of the display result, the combination of decorative symbols that will become the display result is fixed and stopped in the center area of the screen, and the combination of small symbols that will become the display result Fixed and stopped in the upper left area of the screen.

When the variation pattern is a Super Reach (SP Reach) variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 enters the Reach mode at the timing of developing into SP Reach (timing of transitioning to battle performance) after the Reach state is established. A combination of decorative designs is hidden or displayed in a reduced size. Note that the small symbols are continuously displayed in a variable manner in the upper left area of the screen before and after the development of SP reach.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after SP reach development. "T" in the figure indicates timing. FIG. 9-9 is a diagram showing a specific example of the performance corresponding to the first half of SP reach. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern of the SP reach, and after the establishment of the reach state, executes a battle performance in which an ally CA1 and an enemy CA2 battle as an SP reach performance.

The performance control CPU 120 starts a battle performance in which an ally CA1 and an enemy CA2 engage in a battle at the timing when SP reaches reach (FIG. 9-8: T1). In response to the start of the battle performance, a battle start image including the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-9: (1)).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an ally introduction image that includes the ally CA1 and does not include the enemy CA2 (FIG. 9-8: T2, FIG. 9-9: (2)), and then The image display device 5 displays an enemy introduction image that includes ally CA1 and does not include ally CA1 (FIG. 9-8: T3, FIG. 9-9: (3)). Here, the battle start image, ally introduction image, and enemy introduction image are all images that are different from images generated based on objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space, and do not include background objects and are relatively It is a flat image with no sense of depth.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T4, FIG. 9-9: (4)). The first battle image is an image generated based on the first outside viewpoint (OE1), with ally CA1 on the left, enemy CA2 on the right, tree BG1 in front of the character, and building BG2 in the back from the character. It is a three-dimensional image that gives a sense of depth. In Figure 9-9, at the timing of switching from images (1) to (3) to (4), the object displayed on the screen changes from a two-dimensional aspect to an aspect with a three-dimensional effect. It is possible to increase the power of the battle performance for the part-time performance.

The above battle start image to the first battle image are images displayed in the first half of SP reach. In addition, in the first half part, an image generated based on the virtual three-dimensional space may be used as one or more of the battle start image, the ally introduction image, and the enemy introduction image. For example, an image based on the first outside viewpoint or the third outside viewpoint may be used as the battle start image (Figure 9-10: (5), (7), (9), etc. described later), and as the ally introduction image. , an image based on the first inside viewpoint may be used (such as FIG. 9-11 (11) described later), and an image based on the third inside viewpoint may be used as the enemy introduction image (see FIG. 9-11 described later). 11: (13) etc.).

Next, in response to the transition to the first part of the second half of SP reach, the performance control CPU 120 performs a zoom back process targeting the character display area of the first battle image in FIG. 9-9 (4). Then, a second battle image including objects in a wider range than the first battle image is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-8: T5, FIG. 9-10: (5)). As a result, the bird's-eye view area from the first outer viewpoint is expanded, and the virtual three-dimensional space can be used extensively to produce a production effect.

In addition, in this second battle image, effects are superimposed on the fist of ally CA1 and the fist of enemy CA2, thereby informing that a battle will take place between ally CA1 and enemy CA2, and It is suggested that if the ally CA1 wins the battle, it will be a "jackpot", and if the enemy CA2 wins the battle, it will be a "miss".

From this second battle image onwards, the character's lines are displayed on the line telop ST at the bottom of the screen, and the character's voice (character voice) corresponding to the line displayed on the line telop ST is output from speakers 8L and 8R. be done. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the content of the dialogue, and the expectation of a jackpot also differs depending on the form of the dialogue telop ST and the appearance of the dialogue displayed on the dialogue telop ST (color, size, pattern, etc.). You can diversify your presentation.

In this example, ally CA1's line "Kurae!!!" is displayed on the dialogue telop ST, and ally CA1's voice ("Kurae!!!") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The dialogue telop ST and the dialogue can be displayed superimposed on objects (characters, background objects), and have higher visibility than objects. The relationship of visibility (display priority) is dialogue > dialogue telop ST > object (character, background object).

Next, an effect is performed in which the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 approach each other and throw a punch at the opponent. That is, in the virtual three-dimensional space, the distance in the x-axis direction between the ally CA1 who raised his fist and the enemy CA2 will decrease. The performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the third battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T6, FIG. 9-10: (6)). The third battle image is an image generated based on the second outer viewpoint (OE2), and is a three-dimensional image in which ally CA1 is placed in the upper left, enemy CA2 is placed in the lower right, tree BG1 is placed in the lower left, and building BG2 is placed in the upper right. It is an image.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the fourth battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T7, FIG. 9-10 (7)). The fourth battle image is an image generated based on the third outside viewpoint (OE3), with ally CA1 on the right, enemy CA2 on the left, tree BG1 behind the character, and building BG2 in front of the character. It is a three-dimensional image.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the fifth battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T8, FIG. 9-10 (8)). The fifth battle image is an image generated based on the fourth outer viewpoint (OE4), and is a three-dimensional image in which ally CA1 is placed at the bottom right, enemy CA2 is placed at the top left, tree BG1 is placed at the top right, and building BG2 is placed at the bottom left. It is an image.

A series of display switching effects from the second battle image to the fifth battle image (Figure 9-10 (5) to (8)) based on the switching of the viewpoint from the first outside viewpoint to the fourth outside viewpoint (Figure 9-10 (5) to (8)) is based on the SP reach. This is the performance performed in the first part of the second half. By executing the display switching effect based on the outside viewpoint, the player can get a bird's-eye view of the character and the background object, and can understand the positional relationship of each object in detail.

After the switching of viewpoints from the second battle image to the fifth battle image is completed, it is an overhead image based on the same outer first viewpoint (OE1) as the second battle image, and it is a bird's-eye view image based on the outer first viewpoint (OE1) than the second battle image. A battle image in which the distance between the target and the target is close is displayed (Figure 9-10 (9)). Before moving on to the second half of SP Reach, this battle image is displayed, making it clear that ally CA1 and enemy CA2 are close in virtual three-dimensional space, increasing the tension of the battle. It can increase the impact.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 executes a white-out production that improves the brightness of the entire screen in response to the end of the first part of the second half of SP reach (Figure 9-8: T9, Figure 9-10 (10) ). In the whiteout effect, by displaying the whiteout image WO, the visibility of all objects such as the friend CA1, the enemy CA2, the tree BG1, and the building BG2 is reduced. After that, the viewpoint switches from the outside viewpoint to the inside viewpoint, and the second half of the SP reach begins.

In this way, by reducing the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space and making them difficult to see when switching from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, we can reduce the sense of discomfort caused by a significant change in the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. At the same time, it is possible to make the player more aware of the change in scene in the battle. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the visibility of the dialogue caption ST and the dialogue is not reduced by the white-out effect and is visible even during the execution period of the white-out effect, so that the player recognizes that the battle itself continues. That is, the relationship of visibility (display priority) is dialogue > dialogue telop ST > whiteout image WO > object (character, background object).

Note that in the above embodiment, the whiteout effect is executed at the timing of switching from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, and the whiteout image WO is displayed, thereby reducing the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space. In this example, the whiteout effect is executed at the timing of switching from the outside viewpoint to the inside viewpoint, and the transmittance can be changed in stages. By displaying the out image, the visibility of the object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space may be lowered in stages to make it difficult to see.

For example, if the configuration is such that the transmittance of a white-out image can be set to an arbitrary value, the transmittance of the white-out image will be displayed at 100% at the timing when the white-out effect is executed, and the transmittance of the white-out image will be displayed as 100%. At the same time, the transmittance may be gradually lowered, and finally the white-out image may be displayed in a display mode in which the transmittance is 0%. When the white-out image is displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 100%, the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space is the least degraded and easy to see, and the white-out image When the display mode is such that the transmittance is 0%, the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space is the lowest and it is difficult to see them.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space can be gradually lowered to make them difficult to see at the timing of switching from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, and the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space can be gradually reduced to make them difficult to see. When switching, it is possible to naturally switch from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the sixth battle image, which is an image based on the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, in response to the transition to the second half of the SP reach (see FIG. 9-8: T10, Figure 9-11 (11)). The sixth battle image is an image generated based on the inside first viewpoint (IE1). Since the first inside viewpoint is set between the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the first inside viewpoint and the ally CA1, the generated image has the ally CA1 in the center. It is displayed in a large size, and other objects (enemy CA2, tree BG1, building BG2) are not displayed. The player can understand the facial expressions and movements of his teammate CA1 in detail. Here, by adding an aura-like effect to the fist of ally CA1, it is possible to give the impression that the power of the punch is strengthened, thereby adding power to the battle.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lines displayed on the line telop ST in response to the transition to the second half of the SP reach. In this example, ally CA1's line "Ikkei!!!" is displayed on the dialogue telop ST, and ally CA1's voice ("Ikkei!!!") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the seventh battle image, which is an image based on the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T11, FIG. 9-11 (12)). The seventh battle image is an image generated based on the inner second viewpoint (IE2). The inner second viewpoint is set between the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the inner second viewpoint and the tree BG1, so the tree BG1 is displayed large in the generated image. The other objects (ally CA1, enemy CA2, building BG2) are not displayed.

Next, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the eighth battle image, which is an image based on the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T12, FIG. 9-11 (13)). The eighth battle image is an image generated based on the inner third viewpoint (IE3). Since the inner third viewpoint is set between friendly CA1 and enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the inner third viewpoint and enemy CA2, the generated image will have enemy CA2 in the center. It is displayed in a large size, and other objects (ally CA1, tree BG1, building BG2) are not displayed. The player can grasp the facial expressions and movements of the enemy CA2 in detail. Here, by adding an aura-like effect to the fist of the enemy CA2, it is possible to give the impression that the power of the punch is strengthened, thereby adding power to the battle.

Next, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the ninth battle image, which is an image based on the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (FIG. 9-8: T13, FIG. 9-11 (14)). The ninth battle image is an image generated based on the inner fourth viewpoint (IE4). Since the fourth inner viewpoint is set between friendly CA1 and enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the fourth inner viewpoint and building BG2, building BG2 is displayed large in the generated image. The other objects (ally CA1, enemy CA2, tree BG1) are not displayed.

A series of display switching effects from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image (Figure 9-11 (11) to (14)) based on the switching of the viewpoints from the inside 1st viewpoint to the inside 4th viewpoint are based on SP reach. This is a performance performed in the second part of the second half. By executing the display switching effect based on the inside viewpoint, it is possible for the player to grasp the aspect of each object in detail.

Here, the display period of the 6th battle image and the 8th battle image in which the character is displayed is longer than the display period of the 7th battle image and the 9th battle image in which the character is not displayed and only the background object is displayed. It is set as follows. For example, the ratio between the former display period and the latter display period is approximately 2:1 to 4:1. In this way, a situation is created in which the player is more likely to pay attention to the character than to the background object.

Further, a series of display switching effects from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image based on the inside viewpoint are repeatedly executed multiple times in the second half part. While the cycle of the first display switching performance (Figure 9-8: T10 to T14, Figure 9-11 (11) to (14)) is 10 seconds, the second display switching performance (Figure 9- 8: The cycle of T14 to T18, (15) to (18) in FIG. 9-11 is 9 seconds.

Furthermore, the period of the third display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T18 to T22, Figure 9-12 (19) to (22)) is 5 seconds, and the fourth display switching effect (Figure 9-8: The cycle of T22 to T26, Figure 9-12 (23) to (26)) is 2 seconds, and the fifth display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T26 to T30, Figure 9-13 (27) to (30) )) has a period of 1 second.

In this way, when the display switching effect based on the inside viewpoint is repeatedly executed multiple times, the cycle of the display switching effect executed later is made shorter than the cycle of the display switching effect executed first, and the cycle is gradually increased. By shortening the length, you can increase the speed of the battle and increase its impact. Furthermore, by shortening the cycle of the display switching effect, it can be suggested that the notification of victory or defeat is coming soon.

In this embodiment, from the third display switching effect to the fifth display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T18 to T30, Figure 9-12 (19) to (26), and Figure 9-13 (27) to (30) )), a normal button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed. In the normal button effect, a spiral effect UEF (hereinafter referred to as "swirl effect UEF") is superimposed on each of the 6th to 9th battle images that are repeatedly displayed, and the 4th display From the switching effect (period: 2 seconds) to the fifth display switching effect (period: 1 second), the operation preview display, which is an image imitating the push button 31B, is emphasized.

When the normal button effect starts, in the third display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T18 to T22, Figure 9-12 (19) to (22)), each of the 6th to 9th battle images By displaying the spiral effect UEF superimposed on the image, the visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space is reduced. Here, by displaying the spiral effect UEF, the visibility of the dialogue telop ST and the dialogue also decreases. This point is different from the above-mentioned whiteout image WO, and by drawing attention to the swirl effect UEF rather than the dialogue, it is possible to make it easier to direct attention to the operation preview display and the operation section (push button 31B), which will be described later. .

Next, in the fourth display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T22 to T26, Figure 9-12 (23) to (26)), the swirl effect UEF continues from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image. At the same time, the operation preview display BTA1 of the first aspect is displayed in the center of the vortex. The operation preview display BTA1 in the first mode is thinner and has lower visibility than the operation preview display BTA2 in the second mode described later.

Next, in the fifth display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T26 to T30, Figure 9-13 (27) to (30)), the swirl effect UEF continues from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image. At the same time, the display mode of the operation notice display displayed at the center of the vortex changes from the first mode to the second mode. The operation preview display BTA2 in the second mode is darker than the operation preview display BTA1 in the first mode, and has high visibility.

In this way, by highlighting the operation preview display BTA2 in the second mode via the operation preview display BTA1 in the first mode, it is announced that some kind of effect will be executed using the operation section (push button 31B). Ru. In addition, for each of the 6th to 9th battle images, an operation preview display is displayed together with the swirl effect UEF, so that the result of the battle can be determined by operating the operation unit (push button 31B) indicated by the operation preview display. It is suggested that it will be notified.

When the second half of the SP reach is completed, the process moves to the third half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 9-15. Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display BT1 in the center of the screen that prompts the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B) (FIG. 9-8: T30, FIG. 9-14 (31)) . The operation promotion display BT1 is a mode in which a display prompting the player to perform an operation is added to the operation preview display BTA2 of the second mode, and is formed through the operation preview display BTA2 of the second mode.

In this example, the operation promotion display BT1 has the text "Press!!" and a downward arrow added above the operation notice display BTA2 in the second mode, and a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation at the bottom. Formed by adding. Here, since the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 are displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT1, the player operates the operating section in the hope that the ally CA1 will win by operating the operating section.

Note that the production control CPU 120 ends the display based on the viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional space when transitioning from the second half part to the third half part of the SP reach (when the operation promotion display BT1 is completed). As a result, the player pays more attention to the operation promotion display BT1 than to the character, and concentrates on operating the operation section. Therefore, the character displayed in FIG. 9-14 (31) is not displayed based on the viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional space, but is a flat image.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot" (when the variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern), when the player operates the operation part, the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning performance. In the victory effect, ally CA1 is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position), and a common combination of decorative symbols (bookmark) is displayed in the lower part of the screen. In the example, "333") is stopped (FIG. 9-8: T31, FIG. 9-14 (32A)). When the movable body YM is at the advanced position than when the movable body YM is at the retreat position, there are more areas where the teammate CA1 is hidden (covered by the movable body YM) when viewed from the player side, and it is difficult to visually recognize the teammate CA1. The relationship of visibility (display priority) in FIG. 9-14 (32A) is movable body YM>decoration pattern>ally CA1.

In the above embodiment, the victory performance includes a performance that displays ally CA1 and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot, and a performance that displays the movable body YM from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position). ), but the victory performance is not limited to this type of format, and the victory performance may be a performance that includes other performances.

For example, a victory performance includes a performance in which a background image including a rainbow color, which is a display color that suggests that the display result is a "jackpot," is displayed, and a performance in which the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position ( The effect may include a movement to a second position). In this case, the effect in which a background image including rainbow colors is displayed and the effect in which the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position) may be executed at the same timing. However, they may be executed at different timings.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the advance position (second position) to the retreat position (first position), and in response to the completion of the variable display of the special symbol, displays "" in the lower area of the screen. The combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) that notifies the user of "Jackpot" is fixed and stopped (FIG. 9-8: T32 to T33, FIG. 9-14 (33A)). Thereby, the player recognizes that a jackpot has occurred due to winning the battle.

On the other hand, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "lost", when the player operates the operation unit, the performance control CPU 120 executes a losing performance. In the defeat effect, the enemy CA2 is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, the movable body YM is not moved from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position), and at least one symbol is displayed in the lower area of the screen compared to another symbol. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "323") different from the above is stopped (T31 in FIG. 9-8, (32B) in FIG. 9-14). The relationship between the height of visibility in FIG. 9-14 (32B) is decorative pattern>enemy CA2.

Next, in response to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the production control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination ("323" in this example) that notifies "miss" in the lower area of the screen (Fig. 9-8: T32-T33, Figure 9-8 (33B)). Thereby, the player recognizes that the jackpot did not occur due to the defeat of the battle.

(Chance up effect)
Next, the chance-up effect executed in the second half of the SP reach will be explained. The chance-up performance is an example of a preview performance that suggests (advances) that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display of special symbols (decorative symbols) being executed. The chance-up effects in this embodiment include a first chance-up effect using ally CA1, a second chance-up effect using enemy CA2, a third chance-up effect using a notice telop YT and a movable body YM, and a dialogue telop ST. There is a 4th chance up effect using .

(1st chance up production)
In the first chance-up production, the effect added to the fist of ally CA1 becomes a special mode that is larger in size than the normal mode. For the player, as the aura covering the fist of the ally CA1 becomes larger, the expectation that the ally CA1 will win over the enemy CA2 increases.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-15 (1A) to (4A), among the sixth to ninth battle images, in the sixth battle image in which ally CA1 is displayed, the fist of ally CA1 The added effect becomes a special mode. On the other hand, in the eighth battle image in which enemy CA2 is displayed, the effect added to the fist of enemy CA2 is in a normal mode (smaller size than the special mode). This suggests that ally CA1's punch is more powerful than enemy CA2's punch, and the player feels that compared to the case where the effect added to ally CA1's fist is in the normal mode, Recognize that there is a high probability that ally CA1 will win against enemy CA2.

(Second chance up production)
In the second chance-up effect, the effect added to the fist of enemy CA2 is deleted. For the player, it is difficult to recognize that the player is in a relatively superior situation because the aura covers the fist of the ally CA1, while the aura does not cover the fist of the enemy CA2. This increases the expectation that ally CA1 will win against enemy CA2.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-16 (1B) to (4B), in the sixth battle image in which ally CA1 is displayed, among the 6th to 9th battle images, the fist of ally CA1 A normal effect is added. On the other hand, in the eighth battle image in which enemy CA2 is displayed, no effect is added to the enemy CA2's fist. This suggests that enemy CA2's punch is weaker than ally CA1's punch, and the player feels that ally CA1 is weaker than enemy CA2's punch compared to when an effect is added to enemy CA2's fist. Recognize that the probability of winning is high.

(3rd chance up production)
In the third chance up effect, a preview caption YT is displayed on the character's screen. The preview telop YT includes a message of either "CHANCE" or "super hot", and the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the message included in the preview telop YT. In this embodiment, when the second mode's preview caption YT2 with "Very Hot" set as the message is displayed, it is better than the case where the first mode's preview caption YT1 with "CHANCE" set is displayed. There is also a high expectation of hitting the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the preview caption YT is used for the 6th to 9th battle images, as shown in Figures 9-16 (1A) to (4A) and Figures 9-16 (1B) to (4B). Of these, the sixth battle image in which the ally CA1 is displayed and the eighth battle image in which the enemy CA2 is displayed are added to the lower left area and the upper right area of the screen, respectively. In the examples in Figures 9-16 (1A) and (3A), "CHANCE" is set as the message for the preview caption YT, and in the examples in Figures 9-16 (1B) and (3B), "Very hot" is set. It is set.

By displaying the preview telop YT, the area between the preview telops YT is emphasized and draws attention compared to a case where the preview telop YT is not displayed. In this embodiment, when the third chance up effect is executed, the preview caption YT is displayed and the movable body YM moves from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position).

When the movable body YM is in the retreat position (first position), since ally CA1 is displayed in the area between the preview telops YT, ally CA1 is emphasized by the preview telop YT (the visibility of ally CA1 can be improved). On the other hand, when the movable body YM moves to the advanced position (second position) (states in FIGS. 9-16 (1A) and (1B)), the movable body YM is located in front of the teammate CA1 (on the player's side). Therefore, the visibility of ally CA1 is reduced due to the movable body YM.

(4th chance up production)
In the fourth chance up effect, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is suggested by the display mode of the dialogue telop ST. In this embodiment, when the line telop ST2 in the red band format is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the line telop ST1 in the blue band format is displayed.

In this embodiment, the dialogue telop ST extends from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (1A) to (4A) and FIGS. 9-17 (1B) to (4B). It is displayed continuously and is attached to the bottom area of the screen. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-17 (1A) to (4A), a dialogue caption ST1 in a blue band format is set, and in the examples in FIGS. 9-17 (1B) to (4B), a dialogue caption ST2 in a red band format is set. is set.

In the examples shown in Figures 9-17 (1B) to (4B), the lines displayed in the red-banded line caption ST2 are the lines of ally CA1 saying "Let's go!!!", and in Figures 9-17 ( In 1A) to (4A), the lines are the same as those displayed in the blue-banded line telop ST1, but the difference in color of the line telop can suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which a fourth chance up effect suggesting that the expectation level of jackpot is high is executed by changing the background color of the dialogue caption, but the present invention is not limited to this form. By changing the display color of the object that is different from the background color of the dialogue telop, a fourth chance-up effect may be performed that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

For example, by changing the display color of the characters included in the dialogue telop, a fourth chance up effect that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high may be executed. For example, when the 4th chance up effect is not being performed, the text "Ikkei!!!" is displayed in black, but when the 4th chance up effect is being performed, the text "Ikkei!!!" is displayed in black. !!!” is displayed in blue or red. In this case, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the characters "Ikke!!!" are red than when the characters "Ikke!!!" are blue.

Regarding the first chance-up effect to fourth chance-up effect described above, at least the visibility of objects (characters, background objects) is not reduced in the sixth effect image to the ninth effect image. Here, in the third chance up production, ally CA1 is initially highlighted and displayed by the preview caption YT, but during the period when the movable body YM is in the advanced position, the visibility of ally CA1 is reduced by the movable body YM. It is supposed to be done.

[Process for determining performance at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result specification command that specifies a display result, a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern, and a pending memory number subtraction specification command (first pending memory number subtraction specification). command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) to the production control CPU 120.

When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number subtraction designation command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the number of pending memories has been subtracted. memory number subtraction designation command or second pending memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot, loss, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, etc.), and the variation time and amount of special symbols. A variable display of special symbols is executed based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, such as a variable pattern designation command that specifies production contents (reach, pseudo-run, etc.); , it is possible to specify the variation time of the special symbol and the content of the performance (reach, pseudo-run, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and receives the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation in this embodiment. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variation start time performance determination process shown in FIG. 9-18 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. A production control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern is set based on the specified variation pattern. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-18.

First, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (the variation pattern of the variation display to be executed from now on) is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach missed", "super reach jackpot"). It is determined whether there is one (step S03TM1010). When the variation pattern is not a variation pattern with super reach (NO in step S03TM1010), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with super reach (YES in step S03TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 controls the CPU 120 for determining whether or not to execute the first chance up performance. It is determined based on the table (see FIG. 9-19(1)) (step S03TM1020).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second chance up performance based on the table (see FIG. 9-19 (2)) for determining whether or not to execute the second chance up performance (step S03TM1030). ).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the third chance up performance and the performance mode based on the table (see FIG. 9-19 (3)) for determining whether or not to execute the third chance up performance and the performance mode. (Step S03TM1040).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode based on a table (see FIG. 9-19 (4)) for determining whether or not to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode. It is determined (step S03TM1050), and the process ends immediately.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which any one of the first chance up performance to the fourth chance up performance can be executed in one fluctuating display, but the present invention is limited to such a form. First, in one variable display, when any one of the first to fourth chance up effects is executed, execution of the other chance up effects may be restricted.

For example, in the variation start effect determination process, before the process of determining whether to execute various chance-up effects (step S03TM1020, step S03TM1030, step S03TM1040, step S03TM1050), it is determined whether the CU restriction flag described below is set. A process for determining the CU determination process (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "CU determination process") is executed.

If the CU limit flag is set (if it is decided that any chance-up effect will be executed), the process of determining whether or not to execute the next chance-up effect is skipped, and the CU limit flag is set. If it has not been set (if it has not been decided to execute any chance-up effect), processing is executed to determine whether or not to execute the next chance-up effect. The CU restriction flag is a type of flag that is set based on the fact that it has been determined that the chance-up effect will be executed in the process of determining whether or not to execute various chance-up effects.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance during SP reach from becoming too complicated due to the chance-up performance being executed multiple times in a short period of time.

[Table referenced in the production determination process at the start of fluctuation]
FIGS. 9-19 (1) to (4) are examples of tables that are referred to when determining whether or not to perform various performances and the performance mode in the variation start performance determination process.

<Table for determining whether to execute the first chance up effect>
FIG. 9-19 (1) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the first chance up performance that is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the first chance up performance in step S03TM1020 of the variation start performance determination process.

FIG. 9-19(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the first chance up effect. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (1), in this embodiment, the execution rate of the first chance up effect is determined to be different depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". A value has been assigned.

When the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), it is decided that the first chance up effect will not be performed at a rate of 90%, and 10 It is decided to perform the first chance up effect at a rate of %.

When the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), it is decided that the first chance up effect will not be executed at a rate of 70%, and 30 It is decided to perform the first chance up effect at a rate of %.

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (1), the expectation level of jackpot is higher when the first chance up effect is executed than when the first chance up effect is not executed.

<Table for determining whether to execute the second chance up effect>
FIG. 9-19(2) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the second chance up performance that is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the second chance up performance in step S03TM1030 of the variation start performance determination process.

FIG. 9-19(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the second chance up effect. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (2), in this embodiment, the execution rate of the second chance up effect is determined to be different depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". A value has been assigned.

When the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), it is decided that the second chance up effect will not be performed at a rate of 90%, and 10 It is decided to execute the second chance up effect at a rate of %.

When the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), it is decided that the second chance up effect will not be executed at a rate of 70%, and 30 It is decided to execute the second chance up effect at a rate of %.

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (2), the expectation level of jackpot is higher when the second chance up effect is executed than when the second chance up effect is not executed.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute the third chance up effect and the mode of effect>
FIG. 9-19 (3) shows whether or not to execute the third chance up performance and the performance mode determination, which is referred to when determining whether to execute the third chance up performance and the performance mode in step S03TM1040 of the variation start performance determination process. This is an example of a table.

FIG. 9-19(3) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the third chance up performance and the performance mode. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (3), in this embodiment, the execution rate and performance mode of the third chance up performance are selected depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentages differ.

When the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), it is decided that the third chance up effect will not be executed at a rate of 90%, and 9 It is decided to execute the third chance up effect in the chance mode at a rate of 1%, and it is decided to execute the third chance up effect in the intense heat mode at a rate of 1%.

When the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), it is decided not to perform the third chance up effect at a rate of 50%, and 30%. It is decided to execute the third chance up effect in the chance mode at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute the third chance up effect in the intense heat mode at a rate of 20%.

In this embodiment, the preview caption displayed in the third chance up effect in the chance mode is an image containing the word "CHANCE" on a white background. It is called "Notice telop" and "Chance-type notice telop". In addition, the preview caption displayed in the third chance up production of the intense heat mode is an image containing the word "super fever" on a golden background. It is called ``Telop'' and ``A warning telop in a heated manner.''

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (3), the expectation level of jackpot is higher when the third chance up effect is executed than when the third chance up effect is not executed. Also, among the cases where the 3rd chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the 3rd chance up effect is executed in a heated mode than when the 3rd chance up effect is executed in a chance mode. The level is getting higher.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute the 4th chance up effect and the mode of effect>
FIG. 9-19 (4) shows whether or not to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode determination, which is referred to when determining whether to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode in step S03TM1050 of the variation start performance determination process. This is an example of a table.

FIG. 9-19 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (4), in this embodiment, the execution rate and performance mode of the 4th chance up performance are selected depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentages differ.

When the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), it is decided that the fourth chance up effect will not be performed at a rate of 90%, and 8 It is decided to execute the 4th chance up effect in the blue belt mode at a rate of 2%, and it is decided to execute the 4th chance up effect in the red band mode at a rate of 2%.

When the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), it is decided that the fourth chance up effect will not be executed at a rate of 70%, and 20 It is decided to execute the fourth chance up performance in the blue belt mode at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute the fourth chance up performance in the red belt mode at a rate of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (4), the expectation level of jackpot is higher when the fourth chance up effect is executed than when the fourth chance up effect is not executed. In addition, among the cases where the 4th chance up effect is executed, the case where the 4th chance up effect in the red belt mode is executed is more likely to be a jackpot than the case where the 4th chance up effect in the blue belt mode is executed. Expectations are high.

[Holding continuous performance]
In the present embodiment, a case where pending information determined to be controlled to be a "win" (either a "big hit" or a "small hit") is stored in the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is referred to as a "pending series". It is called. In this embodiment, in the pending information stored when a jackpot occurs, there is pending information that will become a "win" in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, within the range of the pending information that was stored when the jackpot occurred. It is possible to perform a holding series effect that notifies you that the next "win" will occur consecutively. In addition, if the display result of the pending information is "small win", it will be a jackpot via small win based on the occurrence of V winning, so the pending information of the small win is the pending memory information of the hit that will become a jackpot in the future. I can say that there is.

The held continuous performance is a performance that is executed when a predetermined count number of winning game balls is detected in a predetermined jackpot round game while being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and is performed by the image display device 5 and the like. This is a performance that uses an attacker lamp to notify that successive jackpots will occur.

<Image retention sequence>
In the present embodiment, a pending continuous performance that uses the image display device 5 to notify that successive jackpots will occur will be referred to as an "image pending continuous performance." The image retention continuous performance is performed in the 6th round jackpot round game when the jackpot game state is controlled (at the timing when the 6th round jackpot round game starts, when the 5th game ball enters the jackpot slot) (timing when a jackpot is detected, etc.), by displaying a pending combination suggestion display including the letters “V GET” and the letter “V” on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to predict that successive jackpots will occur. This is a performance to notify (see Figures 9-24 (10B) to (12B)).

[Jackpot production decision processing]
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the jackpot. The performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot performance determination process shown in FIGS. 9-20 in the jackpot performance process (step S176) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot start designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be performed during the jackpot (and the performance not to be performed) through the performance determination process during the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-20.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hold flag, which will be described later, is set (step S03TM2010). If the pending flag is set (YES in step S03TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the pending continuous flag is not set (NO in step S03TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" ("symbol 10R jackpot" or "10(9)R jackpot via small hit"). ) (Step S03TM2020). If the jackpot type is not "10R jackpot" (either "symbol 10R jackpot" or "10(9)R jackpot via small hit") (NO in step S03TM2020), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as is. do.

If the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (either "symbol 10R jackpot" or "10(9)R jackpot via small hit") (YES in step S03TM2020), the production control CPU 120 It is determined whether the number of memories is 1 or more (step S03TM2030). If the second pending memory number is not 1 or more (second pending memory number = 0) (NO in step S03TM2030), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the second pending memory number is 1 or more (second pending memory number ≧1) (NO in step S03TM2030), the production control CPU 120 controls whether the display result of at least one of the second pending memories is “small”. It is determined whether it is a "hit" or a "jackpot" (step S03TM2040). If any display result in the second pending memory is "miss" (NO in step S03TM2040), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result of at least one of the second hold memories is "small hit" or "big hit" (YES in step S03TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the image hold combination effect. The determination is made based on a table (see FIG. 9-21) for determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance (step S03TM2050).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the image retention continuous performance (step S03TM2060). If it is determined not to execute the image retention continuous effect (NO in step S03TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it has been decided to execute the image retention continuous effect (YES in step S03TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold continuous flag (step S03TM2070) and ends the process.

In this embodiment, the hold flag is a type of flag that is set based on the determination that the image hold continuous effect is to be executed. Since the processing of steps S03TM2020 to S03TM2070 is skipped by setting the pending flag, the second pending memory where the display result is "big win" or "small win" in the jackpot game state currently being controlled. To restrict the decision to redundantly execute an image retention series effect in response to the second retention memory in a state where it has been decided to execute an image retention series effect in response to the second retention memory. I can do it. This pending continuous flag is erased when the jackpot game state in which the pending continuous flag was set ends.

[Table referenced in jackpot performance determination process]
<Table for determining whether to execute image hold sequence effect>
FIG. 9-21 is an example of a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the image retention continuous performance in step S03TM2050 of the jackpot performance determination process in this embodiment.

FIG. 9-21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform an image retention series effect. As shown in FIG. 9-21, in this embodiment, determination values are assigned such that the selection ratios for whether or not to execute the image hold continuous effect are different.

In this example, it is decided not to perform the image retention continuous effect at a rate of 50%, and it is determined to execute the image retention continuous effect at a rate of 50%.

[Jackpot round game]
In this embodiment, a jackpot round effect can be executed in a jackpot round game when the jackpot game state is controlled. In this embodiment, the jackpot round performance is one of a round number display performance, a prize ball number display performance, a music performance, a music video performance, a music selection performance, a replay performance, a replay video selection performance, or a replay preview performance, which will be described later. This is a performance that includes. Performance images (videos) related to various performances of this jackpot round performance are referred to as "jackpot round image" or "jackpot round video."

In addition, the jackpot round performance is different from the various performances mentioned above (round number display performance, prize ball number display performance, music performance, music video performance, song selection performance, replay performance, replay video selection performance, replay preview performance, etc.) A performance may also be performed. Performances that are different from the various performances include, for example, a promotion suggestion performance that suggests that the number of jackpot rounds will be promoted, a mode suggestion performance that suggests a performance mode to be controlled after the jackpot, and the like.

<Number of rounds display, number of prize balls display]
The round number display performance is a performance in which a round display corresponding to the jackpot round number (for example, characters "1 Round") is displayed at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5. The prize ball number display performance is a performance in which a prize ball number display (for example, "00450pt") indicating the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

<Song direction, music video direction>
In this embodiment, during a jackpot round game, a music performance is provided in which a music piece is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a music video performance is performed in which a music video (image) corresponding to the music of the music performance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. and is executable. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of music are provided as the music for the music production. In this example, three types of music are provided as the music for the music production: "Song A,""SongB," and "Song C." The music to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the jackpot round game is It has a configuration that allows players to make selections. Similarly, a plurality of types of images are provided as images for music video production. In this example, there are three types of videos for music video production: "Video (A)" corresponding to song A, "Video (B)" corresponding to song B, and "Video (C)" corresponding to song C. A video is provided, and a configuration is adopted in which the player can select the video to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot round game along with the music. In this embodiment, since the type of song and the type of video correspond, "selecting a song" is the same as "selecting a video."

<Song selection performance>
In this embodiment, during the jackpot round game, it is possible to execute a music selection effect for the player to select a music piece to be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The music selection effect is a music selection promotion display (in this example, an icon imitating a cross key) for selecting the music to be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the jackpot round game at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. ) and a currently selected song display (for example, an image imitating a musical note and the letters "Song A") indicating the currently selected song, and the player can press the operation unit (for example, a This is an effect that switches to the selected song when the cross button (not shown) is operated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the jackpot round game, an example was shown in which the music in the music production and the music video in the music video production correspond to each other. , it is not necessary that the music in the music production and the music video in the music video production correspond.

For example, during a jackpot round game, a music selection effect is executed for the player to select the music to be played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a music video for the player to select the music video to be displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Execute video selection performance. In this case, for example, the player can select song A in the song selection presentation and select a video (C) that does not correspond to song A in the video selection presentation.

<Replay production>
In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot"("symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", "10 (9) jackpot via small hit"), the fluctuation display when the jackpot occurs (the one executed just before) A replay in which a video related to the super reach (hereinafter referred to as a "replay video" or "replay image" as appropriate) that was being executed in a variable display that was performed during a predetermined period of a jackpot round game is displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to perform the performance.

In the replay effect, when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" ("10R time-saving jackpot", "10 (9) jackpot via small hit"), the image will be displayed during the jackpot round game period from the 4th round to the 10th round. This is an effect in which a replay video is displayed on the display device 5.

The replay video is a video related to the super reach (battle performance) that was executed in the variable display that was executed immediately before, and is one of the videos that divided the battle performance into three chapters. This video corresponds to two chapters. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a replay video selection performance in which the player selects which of the three chapters the video corresponding to is to be displayed in the replay performance.

In this example, the video displayed as replay video is:
It consists of three chapters: Chapter 1: First half of SP Reach Chapter 2: First half of SP Reach Chapter 3: Second and third parts of SP Reach.

(Chapter 1: First half of SP reach)
Chapter 1 is a video corresponding to the first half of SP reach, and in this example, is a series of performance videos (images) from the battle start image to the first battle image as shown in FIG. 9-9.

(Chapter 2: SP reach second half 1st part)
Chapter 2 is a video that corresponds to the first part of the second half of SP Reach, and in this example, it is a second battle image based on the switching of viewpoints from the first outside viewpoint to the fourth outside viewpoint as shown in Figure 9-10. This is an effect video (image) of a series of display switching effects from → third battle image → fourth battle image → fifth battle image → second battle image → whiteout image.

(Chapter 3: SP reach second half and third part)
Chapter 3 is a video that corresponds to the second and third parts of the second half of SP Reach. Specifically, it is a video that corresponds to a part of the second half of SP Reach and the third part of the second half of SP Reach. It is. In this example, the video corresponding to part of the second part of the second half of the SP reach is the viewpoint switching from the inside first viewpoint to the inside fourth viewpoint as shown in Figure 9-11 (11) to (14). This is a series of display switching effects from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image based on , and is an effect video (image) of only the first display switching effect. Further, the video corresponding to the second half third part of the SP reach is a performance video (image) of a series of performances from the button performance (operation promotion display) to the victory performance as shown in FIGS. 9-14.

In this embodiment, when performing a replay effect, when various chance-up effects were being executed in the variable display super reach (battle effect) that was executed immediately before, the effect image of the chance-up effect that was executed is It is possible to display replay videos including (images).

For example, in the second half of the second part of SP Reach, if the 3rd chance up effect in a heated mode is being executed, and when Chapter 3 is selected as the replay effect, a replay including a notice telop of the 3rd chance up effect will be displayed. The image is displayed.

However, in this embodiment, when executing a replay effect, when various chance-up effects were being executed in the variable display super reach (battle effect) that was executed immediately before, the chance-up effect that was executed is Among them, the performance that reduces the visibility of the screen of the image display device 5 is restricted from being executed as a replay performance (it is not executed in the replay performance).

For example, in the second part of the second half of SP Reach, if the 3rd chance up effect in the intense mode is being executed, and when Chapter 3 is selected as the replay effect, the movable body in the 3rd chance up effect is moved to the retreat position. The effect of moving the object from the (first position) to the advanced position (second position) (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "movable object effect") is not executed.

When the movable body is in the advanced position than when the movable body is in the retreat position, the screen of the image display device 5 has a larger area that is hidden (covered by the movable body) when viewed from the player side. is difficult to visually recognize. The relationship in terms of visibility is movable body > image display device. For this reason, by adopting a configuration that limits execution as a replay effect regarding effects that reduce the visibility of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to visually confirm the number of rounds and the number of prize balls displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to prevent the game from reducing the interest of the jackpot game state.

<Replay video selection production>
In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a replay video selection effect in which the player selects which of the three chapters the video corresponding to is to be displayed in the replay effect.

The replay video selection effect is performed during the replay video selection period (part of the jackpot fanfare period) when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" ("10R time saving jackpot", "10 (9) jackpot via small hit"). , a replay video selection icon is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5, and the words "Press the button to select the battle replay chapter!!" and a replay video selection promotion display BT1 are displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which the chapter corresponding to the selected replay video icon is displayed and determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the first round) as the replay video.

In this example, the replay video selection icons include a first replay video selection icon IC1 (an icon that includes the characters "Chapter 1"), a second replay video selection icon IC2 (an icon that includes the characters "Chapter 2"), and a third replay video selection icon IC2 (an icon that includes the characters "Chapter 2"). The replay video selection icon IC3 (an icon containing the words "Chapter 3") is configured.

In this embodiment, the replay video selection icon is switched by the player operating the push button 31B. In this example, each time the player operates the push button 31B, the icon switches in the order of first replay video selection icon IC1 → second replay video selection icon IC2 → third replay video selection icon IC3, and the third replay video selection icon When the player operates the push button 31B while IC3 is selected, the icon is switched to the first replay video selection icon IC1 again. Furthermore, the currently selected replay video selection icon is displayed in a larger size than the replay video selection icon that is not selected.

Note that in the above embodiment, the currently selected replay video selection icon is displayed in a larger size than the unselected replay video selection icon, but the selected replay video selection icon is not limited to this format. The replay video selection icon in the middle may be displayed in a different manner than the replay video selection icon that is not selected.

For example, the currently selected replay video selection icon may display a thumbnail of the currently selected replay video inside the icon, and explanatory information (chapter explanatory information) regarding the currently selected replay video near the icon (for example, to the right). , for example, the words "Transformation scene!!", the words "Battle special move scene!!", the words "Battle conclusion scene!!", etc.) may be displayed.

<Replay preview production>
In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot"("symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", "10(9) jackpot via small hit"), a replay effect is executed during a predetermined period of the jackpot round game. It is possible to execute a replay preview effect that causes the image display device 5 to display a replay preview display that foretells the event.

The replay preview performance displays the words "Next Round Battle Replay" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 as a replay preview display in the third round of the jackpot round game.

[Example of production of 3R jackpot jackpot round game]
Figure 9-22 shows various performances during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is "3R jackpot"("3R time-saving jackpot via symbol", "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small hit"). It is an explanatory view showing an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 9-22 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state, the production control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start designation command, displays the jackpot start screen (in this example) on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Then, the characters "BONUS" corresponding to the 3R jackpot are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-22 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, the performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot round performance and displays the image display device 5. Display the jackpot round image on the screen. This jackpot round image includes a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the words "1 Round"), and a prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen. (in this example, "00450pt"), a music selection promotion display (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) at the bottom left of the screen, and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note, and a "song A '' characters), and a music video of the entire screen (in this example, video (A) MV) are displayed.

[Example of production of 10R jackpot round game]
Figure 9-23 shows various productions during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot"("10R time-saving jackpot via symbol", "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small hit"). It is an explanatory view showing an aspect.

In this example, in the replay video selection performance, the replay video of "Chapter 3" was selected, and the super reach (battle performance) of the fluctuating display that had been executed immediately before was executed with a heated third chance up performance. shall be taken as a thing.

In addition, FIGS. 9-24 (10A) to (12A) are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes when it is decided not to execute the image retention continuous performance in the jackpot performance determination process, and FIGS. 9-24 ( 10B) to (12B) are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes when it is decided to execute the image retention continuous performance in the jackpot performance determination process.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start designation command, displays the jackpot start screen (in this example) on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Then, the characters "MAX BONUS" corresponding to the 10R jackpot are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), during the jackpot fanfare period, the performance control CPU 120 executes a replay video selection performance, and displays a replay video selection icon and an image display on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "Press the button to select the battle replay chapter!!" and the replay video selection promotion display BT1 are displayed on the right side of the screen of the device 5.

At this time, among the replay video selection icons, the third replay video selection icon IC3 (the icon containing the characters "Chapter 3") is displayed in a selected state (in an enlarged form), and the first replay video selection icon IC1 (an icon containing the characters "Chapter 1") and a second replay video selection icon IC2 (an icon containing the characters "Chapter 2") are displayed in an unselected state (not enlarged).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, the performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot round performance and displays the image display device. Display the jackpot round image on the screen in step 5. This jackpot round image includes a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the words "1 Round"), and a prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen. (in this example, "00450pt"), a music selection promotion display (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) at the bottom left of the screen, and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note, and a "song A '' characters), and a music video of the entire screen (in this example, video (A) MV) are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the third round, the performance control CPU 120 starts the replay preview performance. This is executed, and a replay preview display (in this example, the words "Next Round Battle Replay") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the characters "3 Round") and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "00750pt"), a song selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a currently selected song display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") ), and a music video of the entire screen (in this example, video (A) MV) are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the big prize opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the fourth round, the performance control CPU 120 starts the replay preview performance. When the process ends, the replay preview display (in this example, the words "Next Round Battle Replay") is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the replay performance is executed to display the replay video RV.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has selected and determined the replay video corresponding to Capter 3 in the replay video selection performance, and in the super reach (battle performance) of the variable display that was executed immediately before, the 3rd stage of the intense mode Based on the fact that the chance-up performance has been executed, a sixth battle image including a preview telop of the third chance-up performance is displayed as a replay video RV.

However, the performance control CPU 120 has selected and determined the replay video compatible with Capter 3 in the replay video selection performance, and in the super reach (battle performance) of variable display that was executed immediately before, the third chance of a heated mode Although the up performance was being executed, the movable body performance in the third chance up performance was not executed, and the movable body YM was not moved from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position).

At this time, a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the characters "4 Round") and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "00900pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") ) and an image containing are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), at the timing when the seventh battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay video RV (in this example). , the 7th battle image including a preview telop for the 3rd chance up effect) is displayed.

In addition, there is a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the characters "4Round"), and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "00975pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") An image containing and is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (7), at the timing when the eighth battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay video RV (in this example). , the 8th battle image including a preview telop for the 3rd chance up effect) is displayed.

In addition, there is a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the words "5 Round"), and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "01050pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") An image containing and is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (8), at the timing when the ninth battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay video RV (in this example, , the 9th battle image including a preview telop for the 3rd chance up effect) is displayed.

In addition, there is a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the words "5 Round"), and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "01125pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") An image containing and is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (9), at the timing when the replay video should move to the second half third part, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay video RV.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display prompting the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B) in the center of the screen as a replay video, and displays an ally CA1 and an enemy CA2 in the background of the operation promotion display. Display.

In addition, there is a round display (in this example, the characters "6 Round") corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen, and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "01200pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") An image containing and is displayed.

In this state, if the image retention continuous effect is not executed, the process advances to FIG. 9-24 (10A), and if the image retention continuous effect is executed, the process advances to FIG. 9-24 (10B).

(If the image hold sequence is not executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (10A), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the 6th round, the performance control CPU 120 continues the replay performance. Execute and display the replay video RV.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a large ally CA1 in the center of the screen as a replay video, and also displays a victory performance related to stopping a common decorative pattern combination ("333" in this example) in the lower area of the screen. Display the performance image (video).

However, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the performance of moving the movable body in the victory performance, and does not move the movable body YM from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position).

In addition, there is a round display (in this example, the characters "6 Round") corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen, and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "01275pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") An image containing and is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11A), at the timing when the video corresponding to Capter 3 of the replay video ends, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay video RV.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the same video as the replay video that was displayed immediately before to be displayed again from the beginning. Regarding the effect control for the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body YM, explanations of the same parts as in FIG. 9-23 (5) will be omitted.

Note that in the above embodiment, after the video corresponding to each chapter of the replay video ends, the same replay video as the replay video that was displayed immediately before is displayed again from the beginning. Regardless of the format, after the video corresponding to each chapter of the replay video ends, a video different from the replay video that was displayed immediately before may be displayed.

For example, a music video may be displayed after the video corresponding to each chapter of the replay video ends, or a video suggesting a performance mode to be controlled after the jackpot ends.

At this time, a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the characters "8 Round") and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "01500pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") ) and an image containing are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (12A), at the timing when the seventh battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay video RV (in this example, , the 7th battle image including a preview telop for the 3rd chance up effect) is displayed.

In addition, there is a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the characters "8Round"), and a prize ball number display (in this example, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game) at the bottom right of the screen. , "01575pt"), a music selection promotion display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key), and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") An image containing and is displayed.

(When image hold continuous effect is executed)
Figures 9-24 (10B) to (12B) show examples of effects when the image retention series effect is executed. Since it is the same as 12A), the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (10B), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the 6th round, the performance control CPU 120 executes the image retention continuous performance. Then, a pending connection suggestion display HR (in this example, the characters "V GET") is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11B), at the timing when the video corresponding to Capter 3 of the replay video ends, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the image holding sequence effect and displays the holding sequence suggestion display HR. (in this example, the characters "V GET") are continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11B), at the timing when the seventh battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the image holding sequence effect and displays the holding sequence suggestion display HR. (in this example, the characters "V GET") are continuously displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the chance-up effect performed using the image display device 5 can be executed in the replay video, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. Execution of the chance-up effects may be restricted in the replay video.

For example, in the Super Reach (battle effect) with variable display that was being executed immediately before being controlled to the jackpot game state, when the third chance up effect in the intense mode was being executed, in the replay video of the replay effect, The effect image (notice telop) related to the third chance up effect may not be displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which the image retention continuous effect is executed in the 6th round of the jackpot round game, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the image retention continuous effect is executed in other than the 6th round of the jackpot round game. It may be executed at the timing of

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the image retention effect can be executed in each round of the jackpot round game, and processing may be performed to determine in which round the image retention effect should be executed at the start of the jackpot. According to such a configuration, the player cannot recognize in which round of the jackpot round game the image retention continuous effect will be executed, and therefore the player cannot expect that the image retention continuous effect may be executed in all rounds. It is possible to play a jackpot round game while having a sense of feeling.

[Second embodiment]
[Board composition]
FIG. 9-25 is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 9-25, in this embodiment, an attacker panel 77 is provided on the front of the special variable winning ball device 7. This attacker panel 77 is formed of a transparent member, and is a device that allows you to visually see how the game balls pass through the interior (special variable winning ball device 7), and includes attacker lamps (first attacker lamp, second attacker lamp). , a third attacker lamp, a fourth attacker lamp, a fifth attacker lamp, a sixth attacker lamp, a seventh attacker lamp, an eighth attacker lamp, and a ninth attacker lamp (see Figure 9-26). It is configured to be able to perform an attacker lamp light-emission performance in which the attacker lamp is made to emit light (flashing) at timing (for example, the timing when a game ball enters the grand prize opening). Note that explanations of parts similar to those in FIG. 8-1 will be omitted.

[Attack lamp configuration]
FIG. 9-26(1) is an explanatory diagram illustrating an attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 9-26(1), the attacker panel 77 includes a first attacker lamp 77L1, a second attacker lamp 77L2, a third attacker lamp 77L3, a fourth attacker lamp 77L4, a fifth attacker lamp 77L5, and a sixth attacker lamp 77L5. An attacker lamp 77L6, a seventh attacker lamp 77L7, an eighth attacker lamp 77L8, and a ninth attacker lamp 77L9 are provided.

<Light emission mode of attacker lamp>
In this embodiment, a plurality of different presentation modes are provided as modes of the attacker lamp light emission presentation. As shown in Figure 9-26 (2), for example, there is an attacker lamp lighting effect in which the attacker lamp emits white light (white light emission), an attacker lamp light emission effect in which the attacker lamp emits orange light (orange light emission), and an attacker lamp light emission effect in which the attacker lamp emits orange light (orange light emission). An attacker lamp lighting effect in which the attacker lamp emits a pink color (pink light emission), an attacker lamp light emission effect in which the attacker lamp emits a red light (red light emission), and an attacker lamp light emission effect in which the attacker lamp emits a rainbow color (rainbow light emission). , there is a performance mode.

[Execution timing of attacker lamp lighting effect]
In this embodiment, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (playing period of the jackpot round game), the attacker lamp light-emitting effect can be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the jackpot. In this embodiment, a count switch 23 is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 to detect the game ball that has entered, and when the passage of the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the attacker A lamp effect is executed.

In this embodiment, a jackpot round winnings counter is set as a counting means for using the number of winnings in the jackpot that is in the open state in the jackpot round game as a condition for ending the open state. Specifically, the initial count value of the jackpot round winning pieces counter is set to "10", and the count value of the jackpot round winning pieces counter is counted down. In this embodiment, the performance mode of the attacker lamp lighting performance is varied depending on the count value of this jackpot round prize winning counter.

<Example of attacker lamp lighting performance>
9-27 to 9-30 show preparations for the attacker panel 77 in the case where the performance mode of the attacker lamp lighting performance is varied according to the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode of an attacker lamp that has been set.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (1), when the jackpot round game starts and the initial value count value of the jackpot round prize counter is set to "10", the first game to the jackpot hole is placed. Based on the detection of winning balls, when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "9", the performance control CPU 120 performs an attacker lamp light emission performance that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit orange light. (hereinafter referred to as "first attacker lamp light emission effect" as appropriate).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (2), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "9", the winning of the second game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "8", the performance control CPU 120 causes the second attacker lamp 77L2 to emit light in orange while executing the first attacker lamp light emission performance. The attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "second attacker lamp emission effect") is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "8", the winning of the third game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "7", the performance control CPU 120 executes the first attacker lamp lighting performance and the second attacker lamp lighting performance, and An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "third attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the third attacker lamp 77L3 to emit orange light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "8", the winning of the third game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "7", the performance control CPU 120 executes the first attacker lamp lighting performance and the second attacker lamp lighting performance, and An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "third attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the third attacker lamp 77L3 to emit orange light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (4), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "7", the winning of the fourth game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "6", the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth attacker lamp light emission performance while executing the first attacker lamp light emission performance to the third attacker lamp light emission performance. An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "fourth attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the attacker lamp 77L4 to emit pink light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (5), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "6", the winning of the 5th game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "5", the performance control CPU 120 executes the fifth attacker lamp light emission performance while executing the first attacker lamp light emission performance to the fourth attacker lamp light emission performance. An attacker lamp light emitting effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "fifth attacker lamp light emitting effect") that causes the attacker lamp 77L5 to emit pink light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (6), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "5", the winning of the 6th game ball into the jackpot is detected. When the count value of the jackpot round winnings counter is set to 4 based on An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "sixth attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the attacker lamp 77L6 to emit pink light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (7), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "4", the winning of the seventh game ball into the jackpot opening was detected. When the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to 3 based on An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "seventh attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the attacker lamp 77L7 to emit red light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (8), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "3", the winning of the 8th game ball into the jackpot opening was detected. When the count value of the jackpot round winnings counter is set to 2 based on An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "eighth attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the attacker lamp 77L8 to emit red light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (9), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "2", the winning of the 9th game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "1", the performance control CPU 120 executes the 9th attacker lamp lighting performance while executing the 1st attacker lamp lighting performance to the 8th attacker lamp lighting performance. An attacker lamp light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "ninth attacker lamp light emission effect") that causes the attacker lamp 77L9 to emit red light is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (10), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "1", the winning of the 10th game ball into the jackpot is detected. Based on this, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "0", the performance control CPU 120 creates an attacker lamp light emission performance that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit light in rainbow colors. (hereinafter referred to as "10th attacker lamp light emission effect" as appropriate).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot round period, the performance control CPU 120 uses the attacker lamp to execute a performance (attacker lamp light emission performance) that notifies that the winning of a game ball in the big winning hole has been detected. , on the screen of the image display device 5, the execution of an effect that notifies that the winning of a game ball in the big winning hole has been detected is restricted. On the screen of the image display device 5, the production that notifies that the winning of game balls in the big winning hole has been detected is, for example, a production that displays the number of prize balls, or a display that displays the number of prize balls on the screen of the image display device 5. This is an effect that displays the corresponding characters "+15". At this time, on the screen of the image display device 5, a jackpot round performance (a round number display performance, a music video performance, etc.) excluding the prize ball number display performance is being executed.

<Light emission hold sequence performance>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a holding continuous effect, and the holding continuous effect that uses an attacker lamp to notify that a jackpot will occur consecutively will be referred to as a "light emission holding continuous effect" (hereinafter, as appropriate, "attacker lamp pending continuous effect"). ). The light emitting hold continuous effect turns on the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 when it is detected that the fifth game ball enters the jackpot in the sixth round jackpot round game when the jackpot game state is controlled. This is a performance that alerts you to successive jackpots by emitting rainbow-colored lights.

<Example of light emitting hold continuous effect>
FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the light emitting hold continuous effect is executed during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot performance determination process, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the light emission hold continuous performance (not shown). In this example, it is assumed that in the jackpot performance determination process, it has been decided to execute the light emission hold continuous performance.

As shown in Figure 9-31 (1), in the 6th round of the jackpot round game, when the count value of the jackpot round winnings counter is set to "7", the fourth game is placed in the jackpot hole. Based on the detection of a winning ball, when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "6", the performance control CPU 120 performs the first to third attacker lamp lighting performances. In the executed state, a fourth attacker lamp light emission effect is executed to cause the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 to emit pink light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2), in the 6th round of the jackpot round game, when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "6", the 5th jackpot is placed in the jackpot. When the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "5" based on the detection of a winning game ball, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first to fourth attacker lamp lighting effects. While the performance is being executed, a light emission holding continuous performance is executed in which the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 is made to emit rainbow-colored light.

[Over winning performance]
In this embodiment, the grand prize opening is controlled to be in an open state, and the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) (the number of game balls entered into the grand prize opening is 10 times). A round game is played in which the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed under the condition that the winning hole is detected (detected), but when a number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number enter the grand prize opening (hereinafter also referred to as over-winning). It is also possible to detect this, and the system is configured to pay out prize balls even when an over-win is detected. For example, if two over-wins occur from the time the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole until it becomes closed, 15 x (10 + 2) = 180 prize balls will be won in one round game. will be granted.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an over winning effect when an over winning effect is detected. The over-winning performance is a performance that notifies the occurrence of over-winning by causing the attacker lamp emitting rainbow-colored light to emit special light (e.g., strong light emission).

<Example of over winning performance>
FIG. 9-32 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the over winning performance is executed during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot performance determination process, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the over winning performance (not shown). In this example, it is assumed that in the jackpot performance determination process, it has been decided to execute the over winning performance.

As shown in Figure 9-32 (1), based on the detection of the winning of the 10th game ball into the jackpot hole with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "1". When the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "0", the performance control CPU 120 creates a 10th attacker lamp light emission performance that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit light in rainbow colors. Execute.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (2), with the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter set to "0", the winning of the 11th game ball into the jackpot opening was detected. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 executes an over-winning performance that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit strong rainbow-colored light.

[V prize announcement performance]
In this embodiment, when the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning game state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87 and enters the V winning area 870. When a V-win is detected and a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small win occurs. When a V win occurs, a V win notification effect is performed to notify that a V win has occurred. This V winning notification effect includes an image V winning notification effect that notifies that a V winning has occurred on the screen of the image display device 5, and an attacker who uses an attacker lamp on the attacker panel 77 to notify that a V winning has occurred. It shall include a lamp V prize announcement presentation.

In this embodiment, a small win number counter is set as a counting means for using the number of winnings to the operating opening that is in the open state in the small win game as a condition for ending the open state. Specifically, the initial count value of the small win number counter is set to "10", and the count value of the small win number counter is counted down.

In this embodiment, when the small winning game is started, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit white light. After that (for example, after 0.5 seconds have passed since starting the small winning game), the performance control CPU 120 turns off the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9. Next, the performance mode of the attacker lamp light emission performance is varied according to the count value of the small winning prize counter of the small winning game. The performance mode of the attacker lamp light emission performance in the small winning game is the same as <Example of performance of the attacker lamp light emission performance> shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-30, so the explanation will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the attacker lamp V winning notification performance when a V winning is detected. The attacker lamp V winning notification effect notifies the occurrence of a V winning by making the attacker lamp emit a special light (e.g., strong light) according to the count of the small winning prize counter when a V winning occurs. It is a performance that

<Example of Attacker Lamp V winning announcement performance>
FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the attacker lamp V winning notification effect is executed during the small win game period in the small win game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-33(1), when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state, the production control CPU 120 causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (2), at a timing 0.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state, the production control CPU 120 switches the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9. Turn off the light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (3), when the winning of the first game ball into the operating opening is detected with the count value of the small winning winning number counter set to "10". Based on this, when the count value of the small winning prize counter is set to "9", the performance control CPU 120 executes the first attacker lamp light emission performance that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit orange light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (4), with the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 opened during the small winning game, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 for a predetermined validity period. At the timing when a game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the performance control CPU 120 executes the attacker lamp V winning notification performance and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit strong orange light.

[Recovery notification performance]
In this embodiment, when the device recovers from a power outage, it is possible to execute a recovery notification effect that displays a recovery display notifying that the device has recovered from a power outage. The recovery display is an image that is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 and includes the words "power is being restored".

In this embodiment, the recovery display is an image that has a higher display priority than various performance images (background images, decorative patterns, performance images related to the jackpot round game, etc.). Therefore, it appears to the player that the recovery display and the various effect images are displayed in this order. However, in this example, since the display area for the recovery display is the entire screen of the image display device 5, it is difficult to visually recognize the various effect images (see FIG. 9-34 (2)). Here, "high display priority" means, for example, that the display layer is at a higher level and appears to be displayed in the foreground.

[Attacker lamp production control when power is restored]
In this embodiment, when the power is restored from a power outage, a recovery display is displayed, which is an image that notifies the user that the power has been restored from the power outage, and which has a higher display priority than other various effect images. When the power is restored from a power outage, it is possible to cause the attacker lamp to emit light in the same light emitting manner as the light emitting manner at the time of the power outage.

<Example of controlling the effect of the attacker lamp when recovering from power outage>
FIG. 9-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when a power outage occurs during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state and the power is restored from the power outage.

In these figures, an attacker panel 77L provided with an attacker lamp is shown on the right side of the image display device 5 for the sake of explanation of the production example. The actual positional relationship of each device (image display device 5, attacker panel 77L) in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 9-34. The same applies to FIGS. 9-35 and 9-36.

In this example, a situation will be described in which a power outage occurs while three game balls are being won into the jackpot during the jackpot round period of the first round.

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (1), during the jackpot round period of the first round in the jackpot game state, when the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "8", 3 When the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "7" based on the detection of the winning of the game ball, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the second attacker lamp A third attacker lamp light emission effect is executed in which the third attacker lamp 77L3 is made to emit orange light while the third attacker lamp 77L2 is made to emit orange light.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot round effect and displays the jackpot round image on the screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round image includes a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the words "1 Round"), and a prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen. (in this example, "00495pt"), a music selection promotion display (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) at the bottom left of the screen, and a selected music display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note, and a "song A '' characters), and a music video of the entire screen (in this example, video (A) MV) are displayed.

As shown in Figure 9-34 (2), in the state of Figure 9-34 (1), a power outage occurs and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, as shown in Figure 9-34 (3). As soon as the power is turned on, power supply is resumed.

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (4), after the power supply is resumed, when the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, which is the gaming state at the time of the power outage, the performance control CPU 120 starts the recovery notification performance. This is executed, and a recovery display FV (in this example, an image including the characters "power is being restored") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, based on the fact that the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter is set to "7", the performance control CPU 120 causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the second attacker lamp 77L2 to emit orange light. , executes a third attacker lamp light emission effect that causes the third attacker lamp 77L3 to emit orange light.

Then, before the recovery from the power outage is completed (during the period when the recovery display FV (in this example, an image containing the words "Power is being restored") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5), a large When the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "6" based on the detection of the winning of a new game ball (in this example, the 4th ball) into the winning slot, the performance control The CPU 120 executes a fourth attacker lamp light emitting effect (not shown) in which the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 is caused to emit pink light while the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the third attacker lamp 77L3 are emitted orange light (not shown).

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp is lit when the recovery display is displayed when the power is restored from a power failure during a jackpot game state, but this is not limited to such a form. When an irregular situation different from a power outage during a gaming state occurs, an attacker lamp may be made to emit light while an image notifying the irregular situation is displayed.

For example, when a magnetic error occurs during a jackpot game state, a magnetic error display is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that a magnetic error has occurred. This magnetic error display is an image with the highest display priority. Therefore, it appears to the player that only the magnetic error display is displayed. If the jackpot round game is in progress when this magnetic error display is displayed, a predetermined attacker lamp may be made to emit light.

Further, when a gaming machine frame opening error occurs during the jackpot game state, an opening error display is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that a gaming machine frame opening error has occurred. This open error display is an image with the highest display priority. Therefore, it appears to the player that only the open error display is being displayed. If a jackpot round game is in progress when this open error display is displayed, a predetermined attacker lamp may be made to emit light.

[Attacker lamp production control related to chance-up production]
In this embodiment, as shown in the first embodiment, it is assumed that the chance-up effect can be executed in the second half of the SP reach. In this embodiment, when the chance-up performance is executed, it is possible to perform a chance-up related light-emitting performance that uses an attacker lamp to suggest (notify) the number of times the chance-up performance has been executed and the performance mode.

In this embodiment, among the chance-up effects, any one of the first chance-up effect, the second chance-up effect, the third chance-up effect in the chance mode, or the fourth chance-up effect in the blue belt mode is executed. It is possible to execute a chance-up-related light-emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "chance-up-related light-emission effect (low expectation mode)") that causes the attacker lamp to emit white light when the attack occurs.

In addition, when either the 3rd chance up effect in the intense heat mode or the 4th chance up effect in the red band mode is executed, the chance up effect that causes the attacker lamp to emit red light is increased. A related light emitting effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "chance-up related light emitting effect (high expectation mode)") can be executed.

As shown in Figures 9-19 (1) to (4), the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, the third chance up effect in the chance mode, and the fourth chance up effect in the blue belt mode are This is a chance-up performance with lower expectations for a jackpot than the 3rd chance-up performance in the intense mode and the 4th chance-up performance in the red belt mode. Therefore, among the chance up performances, when any one of the first chance up performance, the second chance up performance, the third chance up performance in the chance mode, or the fourth chance up performance in the blue belt mode is executed. The chance-up-related light-emitting display is referred to as the chance-up-related light-emitting display (low expectation mode), and among the chance-up displays, either the third chance-up display in the intense mode or the fourth chance-up display in the red band mode. When this effect is executed, it is called a chance-up related light emission effect (high expectation mode).

In this embodiment, at the timing when the chance up effect is executed in the second half of the SP reach, the chance up related light emission effect is executed using the attacker lamp. When the chance-up effect is executed multiple times in the second half of the SP reach, the order in which the chance-up effect is executed is the first attacker lamp 77L1 → second attacker lamp 77L2 → third attacker lamp 77L3 → third attacker lamp 77L2. A chance-up related light emission effect is executed using the four attacker lamps 77L4 (hereinafter, the order in which the attacker lamps are arranged is referred to as "attacker lamps in the order of the lowest numbers"). In addition, if chance-up effects with the same execution timing are executed, the attacker lamps with the lowest numbers are assigned in the order of the first chance-up effect, the third chance-up effect, and the fourth chance-up effect. It is assumed that the attacker lamp is used to perform a chance-up related light emitting effect.

For example, in the second half of the SP reach, the performance control CPU 120
(A) When the first chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up related light emission effect (low expectation mode) that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit white light is executed;
(B) When the third chance-up effect in the intense heat mode is executed, a chance-up related light emission effect (high expectation mode) that causes the second attacker lamp 77L2 to emit red light is executed;
(C) When the fourth chance-up production in the red band mode is executed, a chance-up related light emission production (high expectation mode) that causes the third attacker lamp 77L3 to emit red light is executed;
(D) When the second chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up related light emission effect (low expectation mode) that causes the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 to emit white light is executed.

<Example of attack lamp effect control related to chance-up effect>
FIGS. 9-35 and 9-36 are explanatory diagrams showing the effect mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the chance-up effect is executed.

In this example, in the second half of the SP reach, (A) the chance-up effect is not executed, (B1) only the first chance-up effect is executed, (B2) only the second chance-up effect is executed. (B3) A case where only the third chance up performance in the chance mode is executed; and (B4) A case where only the third chance up effect in the intense heat mode is executed.

(A) Case in which no chance-up effect is executed As shown in Figure 9-35 (1), at the timing when the second half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute any chance-up effect, The sixth battle image is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp based on the fact that no chance-up performance is being executed.

(B1) When only the first chance-up effect is executed As shown in Figure 9-35 (B1), at the timing when the second half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the first chance-up effect. This is executed, and the effect added to the fist of ally CA1 in the sixth battle image is displayed in a special manner.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance-up related light emission performance (low expectation mode) based on the fact that the first chance-up performance is being executed, and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit white light. There is.

(B2) When only the second chance up effect is executed As shown in FIG. 9-35 (B2), at the timing when the eighth battle image of the second part of the second half of SP reach should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120, A second chance-up effect is executed to erase the effect from the enemy CA2's fist in the eighth battle image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance-up related light emission performance (low expectation mode) based on the fact that the second chance-up performance is being executed, and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit white light. There is.

(B3) When only the 3rd chance up performance in the chance mode is executed As shown in Figure 9-36 (B3), at the timing when the second half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the third chance up performance in the chance mode. A third chance up effect is executed, and in the sixth battle image, a preview telop in the form of a chance (letters "CHANCE") is added to the lower left and upper right areas of the screen.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes the chance-up related light emission performance (low expectation mode) based on the fact that the third chance-up performance in the chance mode is being executed, and turns the first attacker lamp 77L1 white. It emits light.

(B4) When only the 3rd chance up performance in the intense heat mode is executed As shown in Figure 9-36 (B4), at the timing when the second half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the intense heat mode. A third chance-up effect of the mode is executed, and in the sixth battle image, a preview telop of the intense heat mode (letters of "high heat") is added to the lower left area and upper right area of the screen.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a chance-up related light emission production (high expectation mode) based on the fact that the third chance-up production in the extremely hot mode is being executed, and turns the first attacker lamp 77L1 into a red color. It emits light.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment, from the third display switching effect of Super Reach to the fifth display switching effect (Figure 9-8: T18 to T29, Figure 9-12 and Figure 9-13 (19) to (30)) , an example is shown in which a normal button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed. In the third embodiment, it is assumed that a plurality of types of effects related to the operation section are executed during a predetermined period of super reach.

In this embodiment, when notifying whether or not the display result of super reach is a "jackpot", a button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B) can be executed. This button performance consists of a performance that foretells that a performance will be executed to prompt the player to operate the operation unit, and a performance that prompts the player to operate the operation unit. There is. Furthermore, as button effects, a plurality of types of effects are provided, including a first button effect and a second button effect.

[First button effect]
In this embodiment, the first button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed from the third display switching effect of Super Reach to the fifth display switching effect.

The first button performance is a performance that foretells that a performance will be executed to prompt the player to operate the operation unit when notifying whether or not the display result is a "jackpot" (first button performance). 9-39 and 9-40), and an effect (first operation promotion display) for prompting the player to operate the operation unit (see FIGS. 9-39 and 9-40). Hereinafter, the first operation preview display and the first operation promotion display will be referred to as "images related to push button 31B."

In the first button effect, (1-1) a spiral effect (hereinafter referred to as "swirl effect") is superimposed on each of the 6th to 9th battle images that are repeatedly displayed, and From the first display switching performance (2 second cycle) to the fifth display switching performance (1 second cycle), the first operation notice display, which is an image imitating the push button 31B, is formed (emphasized) in stages. After that, (1-2) a first operation promotion display and a first operation promotion effect display for prompting the player to operate the operation unit are displayed.

In this embodiment, the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled during the period when the first operation notice display is displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled during the period when the first operation promotion display is displayed. It is valid.

Note that during the period in which the first operation notice display is displayed in which the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled, a special operation (for example, the operation of pressing the push button 31B) that is different from the normal operation (operation of pressing the push button 31B) is performed. When an operation (such as an operation of continuously pulling the button toward you for 3 seconds) is performed, the same effect control as when the operation of the push button 31B is received may be performed.

When the first button effect starts, in the third display switching effect, a spiral effect is superimposed on each of the 6th to 9th battle images, so that each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space visibility is reduced.

Next, in the fourth display switching effect, the swirl effect is continuously superimposed on each of the 6th to 9th battle images, and the first operation preview display of the first mode is displayed in the center of the vortex. Is displayed. The first operation preview display in the first mode is displayed in a manner that is thinner and has lower visibility than the first operation preview display in the second mode described later.

Next, in the fifth display switching effect, the swirl effect is continuously superimposed on each of the 6th to 9th battle images, and the first operation preview display is displayed in the center of the vortex. The aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The first operation preview display in the second mode is darker and more highly visible than the first operation preview display in the first mode.

In this way, an effect is executed in which the first operation notice display of the second mode is formed in stages after passing through the first operation notice display of the first mode. It is announced that some kind of performance will be performed. In addition, for each of the 6th to 9th battle images, an operation preview display is displayed with a swirl effect, so that the battle result can be determined by operating the operation unit (push button 31B) indicated by the first operation preview display. It is suggested that the information will be notified.

(1-2) When the second half of the SP reach is completed, the process moves to the third half of the SP reach. Here, a first operation prompting display prompting the player to operate the operation section (push button 31B) is displayed at the center of the screen. Here, since the first operation promotion effect display is displayed in the background of the first operation promotion display, the player operates the operation unit with the expectation that his teammate CA1 will win by operating the operation unit. do.

In the first button performance, the first operation notice display and the first operation promotion display are displayed at an angle (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the "basic angle" as appropriate). That is, the first operation preview display and the first operation promotion display are displayed without changing the angle at which the push button 31B is viewed from the basic angle.

[Second button effect]
In this embodiment, a second button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed from the second display switching effect of Super Reach to the fifth display switching effect.

The second button effect is an effect that foretells that an effect will be executed to prompt the player to operate the operation unit when notifying that the display result is a "jackpot" (second operation preview display). ), and an effect (second operation promotion display) for prompting the player to operate the operation unit (see FIGS. 9-41 and 9-42). Hereinafter, the second operation preview display and the second operation promotion display will be referred to as "images related to the push button 31B."

In the second button effect, after (2-1) a blackout image that reduces the visibility of each of the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image is displayed, (2-2) similarly from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image is displayed. A special background image that includes golden flames that reduce the visibility of each of the 9th battle images, and a second image that imitates the push button 31B that is enlarged while rotating and falling in stages from the top of this special background image. An operation preview display, ally CA1, and second ally CA3 are displayed. After that, (2-3) similarly, a special background image containing golden flames that reduces the visibility of each of the 6th to 9th battle images, and a special background image that urges the player to operate the operation unit. A 2-operation promotion display, ally CA1, and second ally CA3 are displayed.

In this embodiment, the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled during the period when the second operation notice display is displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled during the period when the second operation promotion display is displayed. It is valid.

Note that during the period in which the second operation notice display is displayed in which the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled, a special operation (for example, the operation of pressing the push button 31B) that is different from the normal operation (operation of pressing the push button 31B) is performed. When an operation (such as an operation of continuously pulling the button toward you for 3 seconds) is performed, the same effect control as when the operation of the push button 31B is received may be performed.

(2-1) When the second button effect starts (at the timing when the second display switching effect starts), each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space is displayed as a superimposed blackout image. visibility is reduced.

(2-2)
(2-2a) Next, the blackout image is erased, and a special background image including a golden flame as a background image and the second operation preview display of the first aspect are displayed. The second operation preview display in the first mode is smaller than the second operation preview display in the second mode and the second operation preview display in the third mode, which will be described later, and is displayed in a mode with low visibility.

Further, the second operation preview display in the first mode is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from a different angle. In this example, the push button 31B is displayed at an angle viewed from the upper right (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "first angle").

At this time, the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 are displayed in the vicinity of the second operation preview display in the first aspect (for example, on the left and right sides of the second operation preview display). The size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 at this time corresponds to the size of the second operation notice display, and the second operation promotion display of the second mode and the second operation promotion display of the third mode, which will be described later. The size is smaller than the size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 when the operation promotion display is displayed.

(2-2b) Next, a special background image containing golden flames is continuously displayed as a background image, the second operation preview display of the first mode is erased, and the second operation preview display of the second mode is Is displayed. The second operation notice display of the second aspect is larger than the second operation notice display of the first aspect and has high visibility, and is smaller than the second operation notice display of the third aspect and has low visibility. is displayed.

Further, the second operation preview display in the second mode is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from a different angle. In this example, the push button 31B is displayed at an angle different from the first angle (hereinafter referred to as a "second angle" as appropriate) when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right.

At this time, in the second operation preview display of the second mode, the ally character CA1 (hereinafter referred to as "ally CA1") is displayed. In this example, part of the ally CA1 (the face of the ally CA1) is included as the image displayed in the second operation preview display in the second mode.

In addition, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 are continuously displayed in the vicinity of the second operation preview display in the second mode (for example, on the left and right sides of the second operation preview display). The size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 at this time corresponds to the size of the second operation notice display, and the size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 when the second operation promotion display of the first aspect is displayed. The size is larger than the size of the second ally CA3, and smaller than the size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 when the second operation promotion display of the third aspect described later is displayed.

(2-2c) Next, a special background image containing golden flames is continuously displayed as a background image, the second operation preview display of the second mode is erased, and the second operation preview display of the third mode is Is displayed. The second operation preview display in the third mode is larger than the second operation preview display in the first mode and the second operation preview display in the second mode, and is displayed in a manner with high visibility.

Further, the second operation preview display in the third aspect is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from a different angle. In this example, with the player's viewpoint directly facing the game machine (game board), the player's viewpoint is rotated about 90 degrees to the lower left with the axis orthogonal to the game machine (game board) as the rotation axis. The push button 31B is displayed at an angle viewed from above (hereinafter referred to as the "third angle" as appropriate). The third angle is a different angle from the first angle and the second angle.

At this time, the second ally character CA3 (hereinafter referred to as "second ally CA3") is displayed in the second operation preview display of the third mode. In this example, a part of the second ally CA3 (the face of the second ally CA3) is included as the image displayed in the second operation preview display of the third aspect.

In addition, the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 are continuously displayed in the vicinity of the second operation preview display in the third aspect (for example, on the left and right sides of the second operation preview display). The size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 at this time corresponds to the size of the second operation notice display, and is the size of the second operation promotion display of the first mode and the second operation notice of the second mode. The size is larger than the size of the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 when the display is displayed.

(2-3) When the second half of the SP reach is completed, the second half of the SP reach will move on to the third half. Here, a special background image including a golden flame is continuously displayed as a background image, and a second operation promotion display prompting the player to operate the operation section (push button 31B) is displayed at the center of the screen. At this time, the second operation promotion display is displayed in a manner of emitting gold light, and is also displayed in a manner of performing an operation in the vertical direction. Further, the second operation promotion display is an angle (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth angle" as appropriate) obtained by looking down on the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board). is displayed.

In this example, this fourth angle is assumed to be the same angle as the basic angle. However, the fourth angle is not limited to such a configuration, and the fourth angle may be an angle different from the basic angle. For example, the fourth angle may be the same angle as the first angle, the same angle as the second angle, the same angle as the third angle, the basic angle or the The angle may be different from any of the first to third angles.

Here, in the background of the second operation promotion display, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 are displayed together with a special background image including a golden flame, so the player can select ally CA1 by operating the operation section. Operate the control panel in hopes of winning.

In addition, when the second operation promotion display prompting the player to operate the operation section (push button 31B) is displayed in the center of the screen when the second half of the SP reach reaches the third part, the operation section (push button 31B) emits rainbow-colored light. Then, when the push button 31B is operated by the player, the push button 31B vibrates to notify that the teammate CA1 has won. At this time, the operating section (push button 31B) continues to emit rainbow-colored light.

Note that in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second operation preview display and the second operation promotion display are images of the push button 31B viewed from an angle where it can actually be seen (front, upper right, etc.); The present invention is not limited to such a form, and the second operation preview display or the second operation promotion display may be an image of the push button 31B viewed from an angle that is difficult to actually see.

For example, the second operation notice display or the second operation promotion display may be displayed at an angle that is difficult to actually see, such as an angle where the push button 31B is viewed from the back of the gaming machine or an angle where the push button 31B is viewed from directly below the gaming machine. It may be an image viewed from above.

[Process for determining performance at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation in this embodiment. The processing from step S03TM3010 to step S03TM3050 is the same as step S03TM1010 to step S03TM1050 of the variation start effect determination process in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

After the processing in step S3050, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance type of the button performance based on the table for determining the performance type of the button performance (see FIG. 9-38 (5)) (step S03TM3060). , the process ends.

[Table referenced in the production determination process at the start of fluctuation]
FIGS. 9-38 (1) to (5) are examples of tables that are referred to when determining whether or not to perform various performances and the performance mode in the variation start performance determination process in this embodiment. Figures 9-38 (1) to (4) determine whether or not to execute various performances and the performance mode in the variation start performance determination process in the first embodiment shown in Figures 9-19 (1) to (4). The table is the same as the one referenced when doing so, so the explanation will be omitted.

<Table for determining the production type of button production>
FIG. 9-38 (5) is an example of a button performance performance type determination table that is referred to when determining the performance type of the button performance in step S03TM3060 of the variation start performance determination process.

FIG. 9-38 (5) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation type determination table for button presentation. As shown in FIG. 9-38 (5), in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the button performance type is determined to be different depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". A value has been assigned.

When the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), execute the first button performance at a rate of 100% as the performance type of button performance. I decided to do so. That is, when the display result is "miss", the second button effect is not selected as the effect type of the button effect.

When the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), the first button production is executed at a rate of 90% as the production type of the button production. In particular, it is decided to execute the second button effect at a rate of 10%. That is, when the display result is a "jackpot", either the first button performance or the second button performance is selected as the performance type of the button performance.

As shown in FIG. 9-38 (5), when the second button effect is executed, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the first button effect is executed.

Furthermore, the second button performance is a performance that is executed only when the display result is a "jackpot", so it is a type of jackpot confirmation performance.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second button performance is a jackpot confirmation performance, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the second button performance does not have to be a jackpot confirmation performance.

For example, when the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), the first button effect is selected at a rate of 99% as the effect type of the button effect. It is decided to execute the second button effect at a rate of 1%.

When the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), the first button production is executed at a rate of 90% as the production type of the button production. In particular, it is decided to execute the second button effect at a rate of 10%. That is, when the display result is a "jackpot", either the first button performance or the second button performance is selected as the performance type of the button performance.

[Example of first button production]
FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode when the first button presentation is executed. In this example, the performance mode when the display switching performance is started each time is shown. FIG. 9-39 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after SP reach development when the first button performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), in the third display switching effect, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the first button effect, it applies a swirl effect UEF to each of the sixth to ninth battle images. The visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space is reduced by superimposing the objects (FIG. 9-39: T18).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), in the fourth display switching performance, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the swirl effect UEF in a superimposed manner on each of the 6th to 9th battle images. At the same time, the first operation notice display BTX1 of the first mode is displayed at the center of the vortex (FIG. 9-39: T22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), in the fifth display switching effect, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the swirl effect UEF in a superimposed manner on each of the sixth to ninth battle images. At the same time, the display mode of the first operation notice display BTX2 displayed at the center of the vortex is changed from the first mode to the second mode (FIG. 9-39: T26).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), when the second half of the SP reach ends, the process moves to the third half of the SP reach. At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays the first operation promotion effect display in an area other than the center of the screen, and displays the first operation promotion display BTX at the center of the screen (T30 in FIG. 9-39). At this time, the first operation promotion display BTX is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from above at the basic angle.

[Example of second button production]
FIG. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode when the second button presentation is executed. FIG. 9-41 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after SP reach development when the second button performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), at the timing when the second display switching effect is started (FIG. 9-41: T14), the effect control CPU 120 starts the second button effect, and then the image display By superimposing and displaying the blackout image BO on the entire screen of the device 5, the visibility of each object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space is reduced.

In this way, the second button effect is started in the middle of the second part of the second half of SP reach, and the visibility of the effect image related to the battle effect that was being displayed decreases, so that it becomes visible on the image display device 5. It is possible to interrupt the battle production as a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the effect control CPU 120 erases the blackout image BO, and creates a special background image BI including a golden flame as a background image and the second operation of the first aspect. The preview display BTY1 is displayed (Figure 9-41: T12). At this time, the second operation preview display BTY1 in the first mode is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from above at the first angle, and the center of the second operation preview display BTY1 is located at the top of the screen.

In this example, the special background image BI is an image that includes a golden flame and a black background. The golden flame of the special background image BI is displayed in about 80% of the entire special background image BI, and the black background of the special background image BI is displayed in about 20% of the entire special background image BI. Not limited to this form, the display area in which the golden flame is displayed in the special background image BI may be displayed at a ratio higher than 50% of the entire special background image BI, and may be 51%. However, it may be 100%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the performance control CPU 120 changes the first mode to the second operation preview display BTY2 of the second mode (FIG. 9-41: T15). At this time, the second operation preview display BTY2 in the second mode is a state in which the push button 31B is viewed from a second angle, and the center of the second operation preview display BTY2 in the second mode is the second operation in the first mode. It is displayed below the center position of the preview display BTY1 and at the center of the screen. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image including a part of the ally CA1 (in this example, the face of the ally CA1) in the second operation preview display BTY2 of the second mode.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a part of the ally CA1 is displayed in both the operation valid part and the operation ineffective part of the second operation notice display BTY2 in the second mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a part of the teammate CA1 may be displayed in either the operation valid part or the operation ineffective part of the second operation notice display BTY2 in the second aspect. For example, part of the teammate CA1 is displayed in the region of the effective operation part of the second operation notice display BTY2 in the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (4), the performance control CPU 120 changes the second operation preview display BTY3 from the second mode to the third mode (FIG. 9-41: T21). At this time, the second operation preview display BTY3 in the third mode is a state in which the push button 31B is viewed from a third angle, and the center of the second operation notice display BTY3 in the third mode is the second operation in the second mode. It is displayed below the center position of the preview display BTY2 and at the center of the screen. In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays an image including a part of the second ally CA3 (in this example, the face of the second ally CA3) in the second operation preview display BTY3 of the third mode.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a part of the second ally CA3 is displayed in both the operation valid part and the operation ineffective part of the second operation preview display BTY3 in the third aspect. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a part of the second ally CA3 may be displayed in either the operation effective part or the operation ineffective part of the second operation notice display BTY3 in the third aspect. Good too. For example, a part of the second ally CA3 is displayed in the region of the effective operation part of the second operation preview display BTY3 in the third aspect.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-42 (5) and (6), when the second half of the SP reach ends and the transition to the third half of the SP reach begins, the production control CPU 120 sets the special background image BI as a background image. is continuously displayed, and a second operation prompting display BTY that prompts the player to operate the operation section (push button 31B) is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-41: T30). Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 displays the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 together with the special background image BI in the background of the second operation promotion display BTY.

At this time, the second operation promotion display is displayed in a manner of emitting gold light, and is also displayed in a manner of performing an operation in the vertical direction. In FIG. 9-42 (5), the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed in a mode in which the movement is performed in the downward direction, and in FIG. 9-42 (6), the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed in the form in which the movement is performed in the upward direction. A second operation promotion display BTY of the mode is displayed.

Next, when the player operates the operation section, the performance control CPU 120 executes a winning performance. In the victory performance, ally CA1 is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, the movable body is moved from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position), and a common combination of decorative patterns (in this example) is displayed in the lower part of the screen. Then, "333") is stopped (not shown).

In this way, when the player operates the operation unit, the second button effect is completed, and the effect image related to the battle effect (here, the effect image related to the victory effect) is displayed, the image display device In step 5, the battle performance as a visible performance can be restarted.

In this way, the first button effect will determine whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot" until the timing of the winning/losing branch of the battle effect after the timing when the first button effect is started in the middle of the SP Reach battle effect. I am not informed. On the other hand, the second button performance is a guaranteed jackpot performance, so at the timing when the second button performance is started in the middle of the SP Reach battle performance, the game player knows that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot". The person can be notified. Therefore, the special feeling of the second button performance can be emphasized, and the interest of the super reach can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the second button effect is an effect using the image display device 5, but the second button effect is not limited to such a form. The presentation may be performed using a presentation device different from the image display device 5.

For example, the second button effect is a second operation preview display of the first mode, a second operation notice display of the second mode, a second operation notice display of the third mode, and a second operation promotion display using the image display device 5. is displayed, and sound effects are reproduced and output using the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the sound effect that is played back and output when the second operation preview display of the first mode is displayed is "sound effect A", and the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation preview display of the second mode is displayed. The sound effect is "sound effect B", the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation notice display of the third aspect is displayed is "sound effect C", and the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation prompt display is displayed. The sound effect to be played will be referred to as "sound effect D."

The pitch (key) of these sound effects may be set according to the pitch relationship of sound effect A < sound effect B < sound effect C < sound effect D, or sound effect A < sound effect B < sound effect C < sound effect. The volume may be set depending on the magnitude of D.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which a combination of ally character CA1 and a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is a "jackpot" is displayed as a victory effect, but the victory effect is not limited to this format. Other effects may be performed as effects.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which a light guide plate is provided at the forefront of the screen of the image display device 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, as a victory effect, a decorative pattern indicating that the display result will be a "jackpot" with the ally character CA1 is displayed. A light guide plate light emitting effect may be executed in which the combination is displayed and the light guide plate emits rainbow-colored light.

In addition, as a victory effect, a combination of ally character CA1 and a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is a "jackpot" will be displayed, as well as a performance image that simulates a light guide plate light emission effect (showing the light guide plate emitting light). A pseudo light guide plate light emitting effect may be executed in which a simulated image (video) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

[Display color of production image]
FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram showing the wavelength (nm) of the color of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "display color").

As shown in Figure 9-43, the display colors in this embodiment are as follows:
・Purple: 380-430 (nm)
・Indigo: 430-460 (nm)
・Blue: 460-500 (nm)
・Green: 500-570 (nm)
・Yellow: 570-590 (nm)
・Orange: 590-610 (nm)
・Red: 610-780 (nm)
wavelength range has been set.

<Similar colors of gold>
In this embodiment, the display color of the preview telop in the third chance up effect of the intense heat mode and the display color of the flame included in the special background image in the second button effect are both set to gold.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set a specific display color as a color similar to gold. A color similar to gold is a display color that is the same as or close to gold, and is a type of display color that can be associated with gold by a player. In this example, colors similar to gold include gold and display colors in the wavelength range shown below.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-43, the colors similar to gold in this embodiment are set in the wavelength range of 550 to 600 (nm).
The display colors corresponding to this wavelength range are
・Yellow green: 550-570 (nm)
・Yellow: 570-590 (nm)
・Yellow color: 590-60 (nm)
It becomes.

Therefore, when effect images whose display colors are yellow-green, yellow, and golden yellow are displayed, these effect images are displayed in a similar color of gold.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the display color of the preview caption in the third chance up production of the intense heat mode: gold, and the display color of the flame included in the special background image in the second button production: a similar color of gold, Although an example in which they are related has been shown, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which other display colors are related may be adopted.

For example, a configuration related to red may be adopted, and if the display color of the special background image in the second button effect contains red similar colors at the highest rate, the fourth button in the red band mode The display color of the chance-up dialogue telop: red and the display color of the flame (red, orange, yellow, etc.) of the special background image in the second button effect: red and similar colors are related.

(Effect 1)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a battle performance on the image display device 5 that indicates whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled. In the battle performance, it is possible to place the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 in positions facing each other in the virtual three-dimensional space, and it is possible to control the game into a jackpot game state by the victory performance in which the ally CA1 wins over the enemy CA2. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the player will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the defeat performance in which the friend CA1 is defeated by the enemy CA2.

In the second half of the battle production, the sixth battle image (Figure 9-11 (11), etc.) is an image of ally CA1 viewed from the front side (inside first viewpoint (IE1)) and enemy CA2 is viewed from the front. The 8th battle image (Figure 9-11 (13), etc.), which is an image seen from the side (inner third viewpoint (IE3)), and the 6th After the battle image is displayed and before the eighth battle image is displayed, the seventh battle image (Fig. 9 -11 (12), etc.), neither ally CA1 nor enemy CA2 characters are displayed, and they can be displayed after the 8th battle image is displayed and before the 6th battle image is displayed again. , and a ninth battle image (such as FIG. 9-11 (14)), which is an image of building BG2 viewed from the front side (inner fourth viewpoint (IE4)). Then, after sequentially displaying the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image, a victory effect or a defeat effect is executed (FIG. 9-14).

According to such a configuration, first, by displaying the sixth battle image (FIG. 9-11 (11), etc.), it is possible to grasp detailed aspects such as the expression of the ally CA1 and the added effects. Then, by displaying the eighth battle image (FIG. 9-11 (13), etc.), it is possible to grasp detailed aspects such as the enemy CA2's facial expression and added effects. Here, when transitioning from the 6th battle image (ally CA1) to the 8th battle image (enemy CA2), by sandwiching the 7th battle image (tree BG1), the 8th battle image (enemy CA2) By sandwiching the 9th battle image (Building BG2) when transitioning from the 6th battle image (ally CA1) to the 6th battle image (ally CA1), the viewpoint becomes continuous in the predetermined virtual three-dimensional space where each object is placed. It is possible to make the player feel that the switching has been made. Further, by switching the position of the virtual screen based on the inside viewpoint (IE), the player can feel as if he or she is present between the friend CA1 and the enemy CA2. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with an impressive performance image that utilizes the virtual three-dimensional space, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the battle performance.

(Effect 2)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 simultaneously displays the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 in the first half of SP reach (FIG. 9-9) and the first part of the second half (FIG. 9-10). This allows the player to recognize that a battle will take place between friend CA1 and enemy CA2 before shifting to the inside viewpoint (IE). Then, after switching from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image is executed based on the inside viewpoint (IE), a victory effect or a defeat effect is executed, thereby increasing the attention to the battle. It is possible to notify the results of the game (suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot).

(Effect 3)
In the game machine shown in the above embodiment, the display period is set relatively long for the sixth battle image and the eighth battle image in which the characters are displayed, and the display period for the next battle image (seventh battle image, 9 battle image) is slow (production progress speed). On the other hand, regarding the 7th battle image and 9th battle image where no characters are displayed, the display period is set to be relatively short, and the speed at which the character is switched to the next image (8th battle image, 6th battle image) (production progress) is set to be relatively short. speed) is fast.

According to this configuration, when the character is displayed, the performance progresses at a relatively slow speed, making it easy for the player to closely observe the character's facial expressions and added effects, and when the character is not displayed, the performance progresses at a relatively low speed. Since the speed is relatively fast, it is possible to make the appearance of the characters more impressive when the screen switches to the screen where the characters are displayed, and it is also possible to emphasize that it is a battle between the characters that are displayed alternately.

(Effect 4)
In the game machine shown in the above embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can repeatedly switch the display from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image multiple times, and the display switching period is 10 seconds, 9 seconds, etc. , 5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second (Figure 9-8).

According to such a configuration, even if the display switching control from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image is repeated multiple times, the display switching cycle of the display switching control executed later becomes shorter, It is possible to create a sense of speed in screen changes and avoid monotony in display switching control.

(Effect 5)
In the game machine shown in the above embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can cause the image display device 5 to display an operation promotion display BT1 that promotes the operation of the operation means (push button 31B) (FIG. 9- 14(31)). Here, after repeating the display switching from the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image 5 times (each cycle is 10 seconds, 9 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second), the operation promotion display BT1 is It is displayed on the display device 5, and a formation effect is executed in which the operation promotion display BT1 is formed in stages from the third display switching (cycle of 5 seconds) to the fifth display switching (cycle of 1 second). has been done.

In the formation effect, the appearance of the spiral effect UEF suggests that the operation promotion display BT1 will be formed (first stage: Figure 9-12 (19) to (22)), and then the operation preview display of the first mode is displayed. BTA1 is displayed (second stage: Figure 9-12 (23) to (26)), and then operation notice display BTA2 of the second mode is displayed (third stage: Figure 9-13 (27) to (30) )), the operation promotion display BT1 is finally completed (final stage: FIG. 9-14 (31)).

According to such a configuration, the operation promotion display BT1 is gradually formed in response to the shortening of the display switching control period from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image. With the improvement in the sense of speed of screen changes, the player's interest in the operation promotion display BT1 can be increased, and the player's interest can be efficiently increased by the display switching control that is executed multiple times and the formation effect that is executed in parallel. can be improved.

(Effect 6)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, when the final display switching control is executed and the completed operation promotion display BT1 is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays the friendly CA1 and enemy CA2 on the background side. I am trying to display it. Here, by displaying the ally CA1 in the upper left area of the screen, the enemy CA2 in the lower right area of the screen, and the operation promotion display BT1 in the center area of the screen, the player can clearly see each of them. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, by effectively utilizing the display area of the image display device 5 and displaying the operation promotion display BT1 between the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2, the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 can be connected by operating the operation section. It can be suggested that the battle with CA2 will be resolved, and the battle between the characters can be further excited.

(Effect 7)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 executes the whiteout performance when transitioning from the first part of the second half of the SP reach to the second part of the second half (FIG. 9-8 :T9, Figure 9-10 (10)).

According to such a configuration, by executing the whiteout effect while the first part of the second half based on the external viewpoint is being executed, the player's attention can be temporarily diverted from the objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space. I can do it. Thereafter, by moving to the second half part based on the inner viewpoint, the player's attention can be directed once again to the objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort caused by the change from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, and to provide multiple opportunities to pay attention to the battle performance.

(Effect 8)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, when the performance image of the third chance up performance of the second half of the SP reach is displayed, the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position to the advance position. In addition, as shown in Figures 9-23 and 9-24, during the jackpot round period, a replay video including a performance video of the third chance up performance of the second part of the second half of the SP (a notice telop of a heated appearance) is displayed. I'm letting you do it. At this time, while the replay video including the performance video of the third chance up performance of the second part of the second half of the SP is being displayed, the movable body YM is not moved from the retreat position to the advance position.

According to such a configuration, after it is announced that SP Reach will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the third chance up production (a notice telop in a super hot mode) is executed. By displaying on the image display device 5 a replay video including the production video of the second part of the second half of the SP reach, the second half of the SP reach where the third chance up production is executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition to satisfying the player's need to see the 2-part performance video again, when the 3rd chance up performance video is displayed in the replay video, the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position to the advance position. By restricting this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the image display device 5 from being lowered and improve the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 9)
As shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24, a music video production video of any of "Video (A)", "Video (B)", or "Video (C)" of the music video production, A replay video of any one of "Capter 1", "Capter 2", or "Capter 3" and a replay preview display (characters "Next Round Battle Replay") of the replay preview performance are displayed.

According to such a configuration, the replay video of any one of "Capter1", "Capter2", or "Capter3" when controlled to a jackpot gaming state is displayed when controlled to a jackpot gaming state different from SP reach. By also displaying the replay video of "Capter 1", "Capter 2", or "Capter 3" when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, it is possible to satisfy the needs of the player who wants to see the replay video again. It is possible to increase the variation of performance when controlled in a jackpot game state, and improve the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 10)
As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the case of "3R jackpot", no replay effect is executed in the jackpot round game. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24, in the case of "10R jackpot", the replay effect is being executed in the jackpot round game.

According to such a configuration, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be a "10R jackpot", by displaying the replay video as a video of the jackpot gaming state, the "10R jackpot" is better than the "3R jackpot". In addition to increasing the special feeling, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the type of jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 11)
Although not shown in the figure, in the SP reach (battle performance) of the variable display that was being executed immediately before being controlled to the jackpot game state, when the third chance up performance in the intense mode was being executed, the replay performance In the replay video, the display of the effect image (notice telop) related to the third chance up effect may be restricted.

According to such a configuration, by restricting the display of the effect image related to the chance-up effect in the replay image, the process of determining whether or not to display the effect image related to the chance-up effect for the replay image is performed. can be omitted, and the processing burden of production control can be reduced.

(Effect 12)
As shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24, when the chapter selected as a replay video reaches the end, the same video as the replay video of the chapter that was displayed immediately before is displayed again from the beginning.

According to such a configuration, when the display of the replay video ends before the jackpot game state is entered, the replay video is displayed from the beginning, thereby preventing irregular situations ( For example, if a situation occurs (such as a situation in which a player forgets to hit the ball with the right hand, or a situation in which the game ball is jammed and cannot be fired toward the grand prize opening), the replay video on the screen of the image display device 5 will be smoothly displayed. This allows the player to proceed with the game and prevents the player from being confused.

(Effect 13)
As shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), during the replay video selection period, a replay video selection icon is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5, and a replay video selection promotion display is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. BT1 is displayed. Then, by operating the push button 31B, the player can select/determine any chapter ("Capter1", "Capter2", "Capter3") corresponding to the replay video icon as the replay video.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state, the player can select at least one of "Capter 1", "Capter 2", or "Capter 3" as the replay video. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the period for displaying the replay video in the jackpot game state from being insufficient, and by allowing the player to select any replay video, the replay video can be displayed more effectively. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game in a jackpot game state.

(Effect 14)
As shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24, when the player selects/determines "Capter 2" as the replay video by operating the push button 31B during the replay video selection period, the jackpot round During this period, a replay video including a performance video of the second half of SP Reach is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by displaying the replay video including at least the production video of the second half of SP reach on the image display device 5, the second half of SP reach when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. To meet the needs of a player who wants to see the performance video again, to display the replay video more effectively, and to improve the interest of the game in a jackpot game state.

(Effect 15)
As shown in Figures 9-24 (10B) to (12B), in the pending information stored when a jackpot occurs, if there is pending information that will become a "win" in the future, the jackpot gaming state will change. After the end of the jackpot, an image holding series effect (letters ``V GET'' on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5) notifies that the next "win" will occur continuously within the range of the holding information stored at the time of the jackpot occurrence. ) is being executed.

According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state, it is suggested that the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not met is a "jackpot" or "small win", It is possible to give a surprise to the player, display a replay image more effectively, and improve the interest of the game in a jackpot game state.

(Effect 16)
As shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-30, in the jackpot round game, one of the attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9 is activated to emit light based on the detection of a game ball entering the jackpot. The attacker lamp lighting effect is being executed.

In addition, the presentation mode of the attacker lamp lighting effect is different depending on the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter, and based on the detection of the winning of the 1st to 3rd game balls to the jackpot, An attacker lamp lighting effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (first attacker lamp 77L1 to third attacker lamp 77L3) corresponding to the number of prizes are newly emitted in orange, and the fourth to sixth game balls enter the grand prize opening. Based on the detection, an attacker lamp lighting effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (4th attacker lamp 77L4 to 6th attacker lamp 77L6) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly emitted in pink, and 7 to 7 to the grand prize opening is executed. Based on the detection of the winning of the 9th game ball, an attacker lamp lighting effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (7th attacker lamp 77L7 to 9th attacker lamp 77L9) corresponding to the winning number are newly emitted in red. Ru.

In the jackpot round game, when it is detected that a game ball enters the jackpot, a music video presentation and a round number display presentation are executed on the screen of the image display device 5, while a game ball enters the jackpot. Execution of prize ball number display effects, etc. that notify that the winning of game balls has been detected is restricted.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to restrict the use of the image display device 5 to suggest the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening, and to use the attacker lamp to suggest the number of winning gaming balls to the big winning opening. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of each performance of the jackpot round performance being executed on the image display device 5 from being lowered, and to improve the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 17)
As shown in Figures 9-27 to 9-30, the presentation mode of the attacker lamp lighting effect is different depending on the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter, and the first to third pieces to the jackpot are Based on the detection of the winning number of game balls, an attacker lamp lighting effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (first attacker lamp 77L1 to third attacker lamp 77L3) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly emitted in orange, and a big prize is generated. An attacker lamp that newly lights an attacker lamp (fourth attacker lamp 77L4 to sixth attacker lamp 77L6) corresponding to the number of prizes in pink based on the detection of winning of the fourth to sixth game balls in the mouth. The light emitting effect is executed, and based on the detection of the winning of the 7th to 9th game balls in the big prize opening, the attacker lamps (7th attacker lamp 77L7 to 9th attacker lamp 77L9) corresponding to the number of winnings are activated. A new attack lamp lighting effect that lights up in red is executed.

According to such a configuration, when the jackpot game state is controlled, attention is drawn to the attacker lamp by changing the light emission mode of the attacker lamp in accordance with the number of winnings of game balls into the big winning opening. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 18)
As shown in Figure 9-31, if there is pending information that will become a "win" in the future among the pending information that is stored when a jackpot occurs, it will be stored when the jackpot occurs after the jackpot gaming state ends. A light-emitting hold continuous effect that notifies you that the next "win" will occur continuously within the range of the hold information that was held (in the 6th round jackpot round game, the 5th game ball enters the big winning hole) An effect in which the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 is caused to emit rainbow-colored light when the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 is detected is being executed.

According to such a configuration, in the attacker lamp, in addition to the number of winnings of game balls in the big winning hole, the display result of the variable display where the starting condition is not satisfied is either a "big hit" or a "small hit". This can give a sense of surprise to the player, and can improve the interest of the game in a jackpot state.

(Effect 19)
As shown in Figure 9-32, when an over-win is detected, the attacker lamp that emits rainbow colors emits a special light (e.g., strong light) to notify the over-win. The performance is being performed.

According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to notify the player of the number of winning game balls that have entered the grand prize opening in the attacker lamp, the player can also be informed that a number of gaming balls that are greater than a predetermined number (10) have entered the grand prize opening. It is possible to recognize that a prize has been won, and the interest of the game in a jackpot game state can be improved.

(Effect 20)
As shown in FIG. 9-33, when a V winning is detected in a small winning game, the attacker lamp that is emitting light according to the count of the small winning winnings counter is made to emit a special light (e.g., strong light). An attacker lamp V winning notification effect is executed to notify the occurrence of a V winning.

According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to notify the number of winnings of game balls to the big winning hole in the attacker lamp, it is also possible to make the player recognize that the game ball has passed through the V winning area 870. , it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is not passed through the V winning area 870, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 21)
As shown in Figure 9-34, when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game and the power is restored, the recovery display FV (" An image containing the words "Power is being restored" is displayed on the image display device 5. When this recovery display FV is displayed on the image display device 5, the performance mode of the attacker lamp light emission performance is changed according to the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter to cause the attacker lamp to emit light.

According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game state and the power is restored after that, when the recovery display FV is displayed on the image display device 5, the game to the jackpot opening is By indicating the number of winning balls by the lighting mode of the attacker lamp, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player that the current gaming state is controlled to be a jackpot gaming state, and the player is at a disadvantage. You can prevent it from being put away.

(Effect 22)
As shown in Figures 9-35 and 9-36, when a low-expectation chance-up effect (for example, the third chance-up effect in a chance mode) is executed, the chance-up related effect causes the attacker lamp to emit white light. If a light-emitting effect (low expectation mode) is executed and a chance-up effect with high expectation level (for example, the third chance-up effect in the intense heat mode) is executed, a chance-up related effect that causes the attacker lamp to emit red light. A light emission effect (high expectation mode) is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the number of executions of the chance-up effect and the type of the executed chance-up effect are suggested in the attacker lamp, so that the player can determine the rate at which the SP reach is controlled to the jackpot state. It is possible to easily check whether the SP reach is high or not, and the interest in SP reach can be improved.

(Effect 23)
As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button performance, the first operation is to display the push button 31B at a basic angle viewed from above with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board). The promotion display BTX is displayed. Then, when the first operation promotion display BTX is displayed, an effect of notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, the second operation preview display BTY1 of the first mode displays the push button 31B at a first angle viewed from the upper right, and at an angle different from the first angle. The second operation notice display BTY2 of the second mode is displayed at a second angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right, and the image is displayed at a fourth angle, which is different from the first operation promotion display BTX. A second operation promotion display BTY is displayed. Then, when the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed, an effect for notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

According to such a configuration, in the first button performance that has a lower jackpot expectation than the second button performance, the first operation promotion display BTX is an image displaying the push button 31B viewed from one kind of angle. On the other hand, in the second button performance, which has higher jackpot expectations than the first button performance, the second operation notice display and the second operation promotion display are images in which the push button 31B is viewed from multiple different angles. By doing so, it is possible to give a special feeling to the second button performance rather than the first button performance, and it is possible to improve the interest in the SP reach where the button performance is executed.

(Effect 24)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, in SP reach, the third chance up effect is executed and a preview telop is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (3), among the preview telops, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the relationship of white notice telop < gold notice telop.

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button performance, the first operation is to display the push button 31B at a basic angle viewed from above with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board). The promotion display BTX is displayed. Then, when the first operation promotion display BTX is displayed, an effect of notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button effect, the second operation notice display BTY1 of the first mode is displayed at a first angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right, and the image is displayed at a fourth angle. A second operation promotion display BTY, which is different from the first operation promotion display BTX, is displayed. Then, when the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed, an effect for notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

Further, when the second button effect is executed, a special background image BI is displayed as a background image. This special background image is composed of multiple colors (gold, black) including the same golden color as the golden preview telop. The ratio of each color among these multiple colors is approximately 80% for gold and approximately 20% for black in the special background image, and of these multiple colors, similar colors of gold, which are the same as the golden preview caption, account for approximately 80% of the special background image. The percentage is highest.

According to such a configuration, the background image when the second button effect is executed is a golden preview telop among a plurality of colors including at least a similar color of the same gold as the golden preview telop, which suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is high. By having the highest proportion of gold and similar colors, it is possible to give a more special feeling to the second button effect than the first button effect, and also to reduce the proportion of players who are controlled to a jackpot gaming state. It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the price is high, and it is possible to make the user anticipate an advantageous development after the button effect.

(Effect 25)
As described above, in this characteristic part, the push button 31B is composed of an operation valid part that can accept a player's operation and an operation ineffective part that cannot accept a player's operation. The effective operation part is a part of the push button 31B that includes the word "PUSH" that can be pushed downward (operation), and the non-effective operation part is a part of the push button 31B that can be pushed down (operated). This is the part of the pedestal that cannot be operated.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-14, SP reach is executed using the ally character CA1 to suggest whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button performance, the first operation is to display the push button 31B at a basic angle viewed from above with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board). The promotion display BTX is displayed. At this time, the ally character CA1 is not displayed on the first operation promotion display BTX. Then, when the first operation promotion display BTX is displayed, an effect of notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button effect, there is a second operation notice display BTY2 in a second mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle viewed from the upper right, and an image displayed at a fourth angle. A second operation promotion display BTY, which is different from the first operation promotion display BTX, is displayed. At this time, the ally character CA1 is displayed in the area corresponding to the effective operation section of the second operation promotion display BTY. Then, when the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed, an effect for notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

According to such a configuration, when the second button effect is executed, by displaying the ally character CA1 in the area corresponding to the operation effective part of the second operation promotion display BTY, the second button effect is executed more than the first button effect. It is possible to give a special feeling to the two-button performance, and to improve the interest of the SP reach where the button performance is executed.

(Effect 26)
As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button performance, (1) the second operation notice display BTY1 in the first mode that displays the push button 31B at the first angle viewed from the upper right; (2) the first (3) a second operation notice display BTY2 in a second mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle viewed from the upper right, which is different from the angle; (3) an image to be displayed at a fourth angle; The second operation promotion display BTY, which is different from the operation promotion display BTX, is displayed in this order. Then, when the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed, an effect for notifying the display result is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

According to such a configuration, by gradually improving the visibility of images related to the push button 31B (second operation notice display, second operation promotion display), the player is informed of the images related to the push button 31B. The image related to the push button 31B to be displayed next can attract attention, and the interest of the SP reach in which the second button effect is executed can be improved.

(Effect 27)
As shown in FIG. 9-42, before the image related to the push button 31B is displayed, a blackout image BO that reduces the visibility of the SP reach effect image that was displayed immediately before is displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed.

According to such a configuration, before the image related to the push button 31B is displayed, the blackout image BO that reduces the visibility of the effect image that was displayed immediately before is displayed, so that the push button 31B The image related to the push button 31B can be further emphasized, and the interest of the SP reach where the image related to the push button 31B is displayed can be improved.

(Effect 28)
Although not shown, in the second button presentation, the image display device 5 is used to display the second operation preview display in the first mode, the second operation preview display in the second mode, the second operation preview display in the third mode, and the second operation preview display in the third mode. A 2-operation promotion display is displayed, and sound effects are reproduced and output using the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the sound effect that is played back and output when the second operation preview display of the first mode is displayed is "sound effect A", and the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation preview display of the second mode is displayed. The sound effect is "sound effect B", the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation notice display of the third aspect is displayed is "sound effect C", and the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation prompt display is displayed. The sound effect to be played will be referred to as "sound effect D." The pitches of these sound effects are set according to the pitch relationship of sound effect A<sound effect B<sound effect C<sound effect D.

According to such a configuration, by gradually increasing the pitch of the sound effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image related to the push button 31B, and also to make the player pay attention to the image related to the push button 31B. It is possible to attract interest and improve the interest of SP reach where the second button effect is executed.

(Effect 29)
As shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-14, SP reach is executed using the ally character CA1 to suggest whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button performance, when the first operation promotion display BTX is displayed, the first operation promotion effect display is displayed without displaying the ally character CA1. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button performance, when the second operation promotion display BTY is displayed, the ally character CA1 and the second ally character CA3 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the first button presentation, when the first operation promotion display BTX is displayed, displaying characters including at least the ally character CA1 is restricted, and in the second button presentation, the display of characters including at least the ally character CA1 is restricted. When the operation promotion display BTY is displayed, by displaying characters including at least the ally character CA1, it is possible to give a more special feeling to the second button performance than to the first button performance, and the button performance is executed. It can improve the interest of SP reach.

(Effect 30)
Although not shown, if a configuration is adopted in which a light guide plate is provided at the forefront of the screen of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result will be a "jackpot" with the teammate character CA1 as a victory effect. It is possible to display a combination of decorative patterns indicating , and to perform a light guide plate light emitting effect in which the light guide plate emits rainbow-colored light.

In addition, as a victory effect, a combination of the ally character CA1 and a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is a "jackpot" is displayed, as well as a performance image imitating the light guide plate light emission effect (the light guide plate emits light). It is possible to perform a pseudo light guide plate light emitting effect in which an image (video) simulating the appearance of the light guide plate is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

According to this configuration, a pseudo light guide plate light emitting effect that simulates a light guide plate light emitting effect is performed without using a light guide plate, thereby making it possible to use a light guide plate that is difficult to mount due to cost and space considerations. A pseudo light guide plate light emitting effect that imitates the light guide plate light emitting effect that was previously used can be executed without using a light guide plate, and the excitement when controlled to a jackpot game state is similar to that of a gaming machine equipped with a light guide plate. You can improve.

(Effect 31)
As shown in FIG. 9-39, the first button effect starts at timing T18 and ends at timing T31, so the execution period of the first button effect is T1, which is the execution period of SP reach. It is within the period of ~T33.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-41, the second button effect starts at timing T14 and ends at timing T31, so the execution period of the second button effect is the same as the execution period of SP reach. It is within a certain period from T1 to T33.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by interrupting the SP reach when the button performance is started, and to give the player a surprise by restarting the SP reach after the button performance ends. It is possible to recognize the performance that has been executed so far, and it is possible to prevent a jackpot game state from suddenly starting.

(Effect 32)
As shown in FIG. 9-4, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the "super reach" variation pattern is executed than when the "normal reach" variation pattern is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-37, in step S03TM3010 of the variation start performance determination process, if the variation pattern is not a variation pattern with super reach (that is, if the variation pattern is "normal reach"), step S03TM3060 Since the process of determining the effect type of the button effect is skipped, the button effect is not executed.

According to this configuration, when the "Normal Reach" fluctuation pattern, which has a lower jackpot expectation level, is executed than the "Super Reach" fluctuation pattern, the execution of the button effects is restricted. It is possible to prevent the performance from being prolonged when the variation pattern of "normal reach" with a short execution period is executed, and to make the case where the variation pattern of "super reach" is executed more conspicuous.

(Effect 33)
As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button performance, (1) the second operation notice display BTY1 in the first mode that displays the push button 31B at the first angle viewed from the upper right; (2) the first (3) a second operation notice display BTY2 in a second mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle viewed from the upper right, which is different from the angle; (3) an image to be displayed at a fourth angle; The second operation promotion display BTY, which is different from the operation promotion display BTX, is moved from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 in this order, and is displayed while switching the angle.

According to such a configuration, by moving the image related to the push button 31B, it is possible to give a special feeling to the second button performance, and the player is given the impression that the image related to the push button 31B does not move. It is possible to make the user recognize that this is a second button presentation different from the button presentation, and to create a sense of expectation for the display result of the variable display notified after the button presentation.

(Effect 34)
As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button performance, the image related to the push button 31B is a three-dimensional image imitating the push button 31B, and the second button effect in which the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled The operation notice display is displayed in such a manner that no operation is performed and the gold light is not emitted, while the second operation prompt display in which the operation of the push button 31B is enabled is displayed in a manner that the operation is not performed. It is displayed in such a way that the light is shining in a golden color.

According to such a configuration, since the image related to the push button 31B is a three-dimensional image imitating the push button 31B, the effect when displaying the image related to the push button 31B from a plurality of different angles is improved. The effect can be improved by displaying an image related to the push button 31B in a state in which the push button 31B is in operation and in a state in which it emits gold light when the operation of the push button 31B is enabled. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the operation of the push button 31B is enabled.

(Effect 35)
Although not shown in the figure, in SP reach, when the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are displayed, a victory effect is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player. Then, the push button 31B vibrates and emits rainbow-colored light.

According to such a configuration, by the push button 31B emitting light, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the operation of the push button 31B is enabled, and by operating the push button 31B, the player can win the jackpot. It is possible to improve the interest when being controlled in a gaming state.

(Effect 36)
As shown in Figure 9-39, the execution period of the first button effect is from T18 to T31, and as shown in Figure 9-41, the execution period of the second button effect is from T14 to T31. It is a period.

According to such a configuration, since the second button effect can be executed for a longer period than the first button effect, the second button effect can be further emphasized, and the interest when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state is improved. can.

(Effect 37)
Although not shown, the actual angle of the push button 31B viewed from the back side of the game machine, the angle of the push button 31B viewed from directly below the game machine, etc. can be used as a second operation notice display or a second operation promotion display. It is possible to display images viewed from an angle that is difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, by displaying images related to the push button 31B from a plurality of different angles, including angles at which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the push button 31B, the second button presentation is more effective than the first button presentation. A special feeling can be given to the button performance, and the interest in the SP reach where the button performance is executed can be improved.

(Effect 38)
As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button performance, the first operation preview display before the first operation promotion display is such that the player's operation on the push button 31B is disabled ( not enabled).

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button performance, the second operation preview display before the second operation promotion display disables the player's operation on the push button 31B. (not enabled).

According to such a configuration, in the first button performance, the operation of the push button 31B becomes effective before the first operation promotion display is displayed, which reduces the performance effect of the first button performance. Similarly, in the second button presentation, the operation of the push button 31B becomes effective before the second operation promotion display is displayed, reducing the presentation effect of the second button presentation. This can be prevented.

(Effect 39)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, in SP reach, the third chance up effect is executed and a preview telop is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (3), among the preview telops, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the relationship of white notice telop < gold notice telop.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, when the second button effect is executed, the special background image BI is displayed as the background image. This special background image is composed of multiple colors (gold, black) including the same golden color as the golden preview telop. The ratio of each color among these multiple colors is approximately 80% for gold and approximately 20% for black in the special background image, and of these multiple colors, similar colors of gold, which are the same as the golden preview caption, account for approximately 80% of the special background image. The percentage is highest.

According to such a configuration, the background image when the second button effect is executed is a golden preview telop among a plurality of colors including at least a similar color of the same gold as the golden preview telop, which suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is high. By having the highest proportion of gold and similar colors, it is possible to give a more special feeling to the second button effect than the first button effect, and also to reduce the proportion of players who are controlled to a jackpot gaming state. It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the price is high, and it is possible to make the user anticipate an advantageous development after the button effect.

[Other variations]
(1) In the above embodiment, an example is explained in which the viewpoints are switched in the order of the first outer viewpoint (OE1), the second outer viewpoint (OE2), the third outer viewpoint (OE3), and the fourth outer viewpoint (OE4). However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the order of switching the outside viewpoints can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the order may be OE1→OE3→OE2→OE4, or the order may be OE2→OE4→OE1→OE3. In addition, a plurality of viewpoint switching patterns are provided as viewpoint switching patterns for the outer viewpoint, and based on the fluctuation pattern or the display result (jackpot, loss), which of the plurality of viewpoint switching patterns is used to select the outer viewpoint. It may also be possible to decide whether to switch. Further, there may be a viewpoint switching pattern that includes a specific viewpoint and a viewpoint switching pattern that does not include a specific viewpoint. For example, a viewpoint switching pattern with a low jackpot expectation has a low proportion of specific viewpoints (e.g., OE2 or OE4), and a viewpoint switching pattern with a high jackpot expectation contains a specific viewpoint (e.g., OE2 or OE4). may be included in a high proportion.

(2) The above embodiment describes an example in which the viewpoints are switched in the order of the first inside viewpoint (IE1), the second inside viewpoint (IE2), the third inside viewpoint (IE3), and the fourth inside viewpoint (IE4). However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the switching order of the inside viewpoints can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the order may be IE1→IE3→IE2→IE4, or IE2→IE4→IE1→IE3. In addition, a plurality of viewpoint switching patterns are provided as viewpoint switching patterns for the inside viewpoint, and based on the fluctuation pattern or the display result (jackpot, loss), which viewpoint switching pattern among the plurality of viewpoint switching patterns is used to change the inside viewpoint. It may also be possible to decide whether to switch. Further, there may be a viewpoint switching pattern that includes a specific viewpoint and a viewpoint switching pattern that does not include a specific viewpoint. For example, a viewpoint switching pattern with a low jackpot expectation has a low proportion of specific viewpoints (for example, IE1 or IE3 directly facing the character), and a viewpoint switching pattern with a high jackpot expectation has a low proportion of specific viewpoints (for example, IE1 or IE3 directly facing the character). IE1 and IE3) may be included at a high rate.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the battle performance is a performance that is executed during the variable display period of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and that suggests whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled. It is not limited to this form. For example, the battle performance may be performed during a period when the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state, and may be a performance that indicates the number of rounds. For example, the battle performance may be performed during the period from 1R to 5R, and if the ally CA1 wins, the round continues until 10R, and if the enemy CA2 wins, the round ends at 5R.

Further, the battle performance may be a performance that is executed during a period in which the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state, and may be a performance that suggests the number of time reductions. For example, the battle effect may be executed during a round, and if the ally CA1 wins, the number of time reductions is 7 times, and if the enemy CA2 wins, the number of time reductions is 1 time.

In addition, if the gaming machine is a variable game machine, the battle performance is executed during the round, and if the ally CA1 wins, it will be controlled to the variable condition after the jackpot ends, and if the enemy CA2 wins, it will not be controlled to the variable condition after the jackpot ends. It may be a performance. Further, the battle performance may be a performance that is executed during a variable display period that is executed in a variable probability state, and if the ally CA1 wins, the variable probability state continues, and if the enemy CA2 wins, the variable probability state ends.

(4) In the above embodiment, (i) the display result of the variable display is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the display result becomes a "jackpot" [type of jackpot], and (ii) the display result of the variable display is "jackpot". Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the V-winning area in the V-winning device, the game medium is controlled to be in a small-winning gaming state based on the fact that the game medium has entered the V-winning area. This is a gaming machine equipped with a [type 2 jackpot] that controls the gaming state. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [type 1 + type 2 mixed machine] that has a pattern of [type 1 jackpot] and [type 2 jackpot] as a pattern for controlling the (i + ii) jackpot gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the various effects shown in the embodiments described above may be applied to gaming machines having different gaming properties.

(4-1) For example, the effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay of a [V-ST machine]. [V-ST machine] In the first round of the jackpot game state, after the game ball enters the variable V winning ball device (V lid) described later, the game ball enters the V winning hole, and after the jackpot game ends. This is a gaming machine that has a gaming feature in which probability change control, which will be described later, is executed over a maximum of 70 variable displays.

The gaming states include a "normal state" (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "probability change control is not executed (gaming state)") which is a low probability state and a non-time saving state, and a high probability state and a time saving state. A "probability variable state" (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "probability variable control is executed (gaming state)") shall be provided. In the [V-ST machine], the probability variable state is the end of either one of the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) or the start of the next jackpot game state. Continues until the condition is met first.

Further, as jackpot types, there are provided a "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, and a "probability variable jackpot" in which probability variable control is executed.

In addition, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) shall be provided inside the big winning opening. The mechanism of the variable V winning ball device is the same as the V judgment winning ball device 87, so the explanation will be omitted. The open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state in which the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds) and a long open state in which the open state is long (for example, 15 seconds). ). "Normal jackpot" means that the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and "probable strange jackpot" is that the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot playing state. shall be taken as a thing.

The jackpot game state due to the "normal jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that changes the jackpot into an open state advantageous to the player in the first to third rounds. In addition, in the "normal jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, so it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect much, it's essentially a "normal jackpot." For example, the "normal jackpot" includes a "3R normal jackpot" with 3 rounds and a "10R normal jackpot" with 10 rounds.

The jackpot game state due to the "probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which the jackpot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the 1st to 3rd rounds/10th round. In addition, in the "probability variable jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot. For example, the "probable variable jackpot" includes a "3R variable probability jackpot" in which the number of rounds is 3, and a "10R variable variable jackpot" in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds.

In such a [V-ST machine] gaming machine, various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied.

For example, in a [V-ST machine] gaming machine, an attacker lamp lighting performance may be performed at the timing when the first game ball enters the jackpot during each jackpot round period in the jackpot game state. In this case, the attacker lamp that is emitted by the attacker lamp lighting effect indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot round game that is currently being executed. For example, when the first attacker lamp 77L1 newly emits light, it is suggested that the first round of jackpot round games is being executed, and when the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 newly emits light, It is suggested that the fifth round of jackpot round games is being executed.

Then, when the game ball enters the V winning area and is detected at the timing when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state, and a V winning occurs, the V winning is notified that the V winning has occurred. An announcement performance will be held. This V winning notification effect includes an image V winning notification effect that notifies that a V winning has occurred on the screen of the image display device 5, and an attacker who uses an attacker lamp on the attacker panel 77 to notify that a V winning has occurred. It shall include a lamp V prize announcement presentation.

For example, in a jackpot round game of "probable variable jackpot", when the variable V winning ball device enters the long open state in the first round, the game ball enters the V winning area and is detected, and a V winning occurs. In addition, it is possible to perform an attacker lamp V winning notification effect that notifies that a V winning has occurred. The presentation mode of the attacker lamp V winning notification presentation is the same as the presentation mode shown in FIG. 9-33, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(4-2) Furthermore, the effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gaming property of [V-Probable Variable Machine]. [V-Probability Variable Machine] is provided with a normal state which is a low probability state and a probability variable state which is a high probability state (gaming state in which probability variable control is executed). There are two types of jackpots: "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, and "variable probability jackpot" in which probability variable control is executed. [V-Probable Variable Machine] is a game ball that enters the variable V winning ball device (V lid) mentioned above in the first round of the jackpot game state, and then enters the V winning hole, so that after the jackpot game ends. This is a gaming machine that has a gaming feature in which probability variable control is executed over a period until the next jackpot occurs.

In such a [V-probability change machine] gaming machine, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(5) In the above embodiment, the entire jackpot round period is set as the period in which songs can be selected, but this is not the only option. May be set.

For example, the period from the 1st round to the 3rd round of the jackpot round period is set as the period in which music can be selected, and the period from the 4th round to the 10th round in the jackpot round period is set as the period when music cannot be selected. May be set.

(6) In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", a replay preview effect that foretells that the replay effect will be executed is provided at a timing before the replay effect of the jackpot round game is executed. Although an example of execution has been shown, the replay effect is not limited to this form, and when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the replay effect may be executed at a timing different from the timing before the replay effect of the jackpot round game is executed. A replay preview effect that foretells/announces that the program will be executed, is being executed, or has been executed may be executed.

For example, replay preview effects are executed at the timings (A) to (D) shown below.
(A) Timing when the replay effect starts (B) Timing after the replay effect starts and before it ends (C) Timing when the replay effect ends (D) Timing after the replay effect ends

Below, (B) of the above-mentioned (A) to (D) will be explained.
At the timing when three seconds have elapsed since the start of the replay performance of the jackpot round game, a replay preview performance may be executed to notify that the replay performance is being executed. At this time, the replay preview display may include an explanatory video corresponding to the replay video of the replay performance currently being executed (for example, a video in which a predetermined character explains the performance being performed in the replay video), etc. good.

(7) In the above embodiment, when the replay effect is being performed, the image display device 5 is used to display the replay video, and only the music selected from the speakers 8L and 8R is reproduced and output. . However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when a replay effect is being executed, the image display device 5 is used to display a replay video, and the music selected from the speakers 8L and 8R and a sound different from the music are displayed. may be reproduced and output.

For example, when a replay effect is being performed, the replay video is displayed using the image display device 5, and the selected music is being played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Performance sounds (sound effects, character voices, etc.) may be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(8) In the above embodiment, when a replay effect is being executed, an example is shown in which the execution of the effect using the movable body YM that reduces the visibility of the image display device 5 is restricted. Regardless of the form, when a replay effect is being executed, execution of the effect using a device other than the movable body YM that reduces the visibility of the image display device 5 may be restricted.

For example, a light guide plate is provided at the forefront of the screen of the image display device 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, and when an effect is added to the fist of the ally character CA1 as a first chance-up effect, the light guide plate emits red light. If a configuration is adopted in which a red light guide plate light emitting effect can be executed, in the replay video, when the first chance up effect is executed, the image display device 5 is used to display the fist of the ally character CA1 of the first chance up effect. While the effect video to which the effect is added is displayed, the execution of the red light guide plate light emitting effect of the first chance up effect using the light guide plate is restricted.

(9) In the above embodiment, during the period in which the replay effect is being executed, a prize ball number display effect that notifies that the winning of game balls in the big winning hole has been detected may be executed. may be restricted.

(10) In the above embodiment, depending on the number of winning game balls in the grand prize opening, (1 to 3) attacker lamps emit orange light, and (4 to 6) attacker lamps emit light in orange. Examples are shown in which an attacker lamp lighting effect where the attacker lamps emit pink light, an attacker lamp lighting effect where (7 to 9) attacker lamps emit red light, and an attacker lamp lighting effect where (10) attacker lamps emit rainbow colors are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the attacker lamp may be caused to emit light in a light emitting manner different from the above example, depending on the number of winnings of game balls into the grand prize opening.

For example, multiple types of display colors including similar colors (orange, pink, red) were used to emit light depending on the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening. Depending on the number of winning game balls placed in the mouth, a plurality of display colors that do not include similar colors (orange, pink, red) may be used to emit light.

For example, depending on the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening, (1 to 3) attacker lamps will emit orange light, and (4 to 6) attacker lamps will emit blue light. Effects, (7 to 9) attacker lamp emission effects in which the attacker lamps emit purple light, and (10) attacker lamp emission effects in which the attacker lamps emit white light may be executed.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the attacker lamp is made to emit light in a predetermined display color at the timing when a game ball enters the grand prize opening. May be executed.

For example, at the timing when a game ball enters the big prize opening, the attacker lamp may be made to emit light in a predetermined display color while gradually increasing the brightness from 0% to 100%. Further, at the timing when a game ball enters the big prize opening, the light emitting area may be gradually expanded from the lower left to the upper right of the attacker lamp and emitted in a predetermined display color. Moreover, by combining these methods, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the attacker lamp is emitting light in a flowing manner from the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an image related to the push button 31B is displayed as a second operation preview display in the second button effect, but the second button effect is not limited to this form. In the production, an image related to a device (production device) different from the push button 31B may be displayed as the second operation preview display.

For example, in the second button performance, an image related to the gaming machine frame, an image related to the gaming lamp, an image related to the entire gaming machine, an image related to the image display device 5, etc. are displayed as the second operation preview display. may be done.

(13) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a part of the SP reach is displayed as the replay video, but the present invention is not limited to this format, and the entire SP reach may be displayed as the replay video. .

(14) In the above embodiment, the size of the attacker lamp of the attacker panel is the same for all of the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9, but the size is limited to such a form. First, all of the first to ninth attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9 may not have the same size.

For example, the size may be set according to the size relationship of the first attacker lamp 77L1<the second attacker lamp 77L2<...<the eighth attacker lamp 77L8<the ninth attacker lamp 77L9, or the ninth attacker lamp 77L9<the eighth attacker lamp 77L9. The size may be set based on the size relationship of the attacker lamp 77L8<...<second attacker lamp 77L2<first attacker lamp 77L1.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the cycle of the display switching effect becomes shorter as the number of times increases; however, the cycle of the display switching effect does not become shorter as the number of times increases. You can.

For example, the cycle of the display switching effect is set according to patterns (A) to (C) shown below.
(A) The cycle of the display switching effect becomes longer as the number of times increases (B) The cycle of the display switching effect becomes the same no matter the number of times (C) The cycle of the display switching effect increases depending on the number of times the previous display switching effect becomes shorter or longer than the period of

(16) In the above embodiment, when the second button effect is executed, various characters (ally CA1, Although we have shown an example in which 2 allies CA3) are displayed, the present invention is not limited to this form, and even if various characters are displayed near the image related to the push button 31B when the second button effect is executed. It's fine, and it doesn't have to be displayed.

For example, the second button effect is executed in the following patterns (A) to (D).
(A) Second operation preview display: Various characters are displayed,
2nd operation promotion display: Various characters are displayed (B) 2nd operation notice display: Various characters are not displayed,
2nd operation promotion display: Various characters are displayed (C) 2nd operation notice display: Various characters are displayed,
2nd operation promotion display: No display of various characters (B) 2nd operation notice display: No display of various characters,
2nd operation promotion display: No display of various characters

(17) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the suspended continuous performance can be executed in the case of "10R jackpot", but the suspended continuous performance is not limited to this form, but can also be executed in jackpots other than the "10R jackpot". It's okay.

For example, a pending continuous effect may be executed in “3R jackpot”. In this case, while the third round jackpot round game is being executed, the pending continuous performance is executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a replay effect can be executed for a "10R jackpot," but the replay effect is not limited to this type of format. good.

For example, a replay effect may be performed in "3R jackpot". In this case, during the jackpot fanfare period, a replay preview performance is performed together with a replay video selection performance, and a replay performance is performed from the jackpot round game of the first round, and the replay video is displayed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which neither ally CA1 nor enemy CA2 is displayed in the seventh battle image based on the inner second viewpoint and the ninth battle image based on the inner fourth viewpoint. However, at least one of the friend CA1 and the enemy CA2 may be displayed in the seventh battle image based on the second inner viewpoint or the ninth battle image based on the fourth inner viewpoint.

For example, in the seventh battle image, a part (left part) of the ally CA1 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a part (right part) of the enemy CA2 is displayed on the left side of the screen. Further, in the ninth battle image, a part (left part) of the enemy CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a part (right part) of the ally CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen.

According to such a configuration, in a series of performances in which the 6th battle image to the 9th battle image are displayed, switching from the 6th battle image → 7th battle image → 8th battle image → 9th battle image can be seamlessly performed. You can improve the interest of SP Reach.

(20) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp lighting effect can be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state. However, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state, a performance different from the attacker lamp light emission performance may be executed at the timing when the game ball enters the big prize opening.

For example, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state, at the timing when the game ball enters the jackpot, the attacker lamp lighting effect is executed, and the winning sound effect is executed to play and output the winning sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may.

The type of winning sound effect may be changed depending on the number of winning game balls that enter the big winning hole. For example, when the number of winning game balls in the grand prize opening is 1 to 3, the winning sound effect A is played back, and when the number of winning gaming balls in the grand winning opening is 4 to 6, the winning sound effect A is played. B is played back and output, and when the number of winning game balls in the grand prize opening is 7 to 9, winning sound effect C is played back and output, and when the number of winning game balls in the grand winning opening is 10, winning is achieved. The sound effect D may be reproduced and output.

Further, the mode (volume, pitch) of the winning sound effect may be changed depending on the number of winning game balls that enter the big winning hole. For example, if the number of winning game balls to the grand prize opening is 1 to 3 < If the number of winning gaming balls to the grand prize opening is 4 to 6 < The number of winning gaming balls to the grand prize opening is 7 ~ In the case of 9 < If the number of winning game balls in the grand prize opening is 10, the volume of the winning sound effect may become louder, and the pitch (key) of the winning sound effect may be higher. It's okay to be.

In addition, the volume of the winning sound effect is constant without changing depending on the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole, and the pitch (key) of the winning sound effect is changed depending on the number of game balls entering the big winning hole. The sound pitch (key) of the winning sound effect may be set to be constant without being changed depending on the number of winnings of the game ball into the big winning hole, and the sound volume (volume) of the winning sound effect may be changed depending on the number of winnings. , may be changed depending on the number of winnings of game balls into the big winning hole.

(21) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp lighting effect is executed based on the detection of the winning of a game ball in the big winning hole in the jackpot round game. However, the attacker lamp lighting performance may be executed based on the detection of winning of the game ball in a game state different from the jackpot round game.

For example, as a small winning game state, there is a first KT state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the special winning opening in a small winning game and it is difficult to award a prize ball, and a first KT state in which it is difficult to award a prize ball because it is difficult to enter a winning ball into the special winning opening in a small winning game. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 which has the gameplay of a [small winning RUSH machine] in which a second KT state (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "small winning RUSH state") in which prize balls are easily awarded, a small winning RUSH machine is provided. During the winning RUSH state, an attacker lamp lighting effect may be executed based on detecting winning of a game ball into a special winning opening.

(22) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the execution of both the first button effect and the second button effect among the button effects is restricted in a variation pattern involving normal reach, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. In the variation pattern with normal reach, execution of at least one of the first button performance and the second button performance may be restricted among the button performances.

For example, in a variation pattern involving normal reach, execution of the second button effect may be restricted while execution of the first button effect may be made possible.

(23) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second button effect can be executed when notifying whether the display result is a "jackpot", but this is not limited to this embodiment. A second button effect may be executed when notifying that the time saving state C is controlled.

For example, the second button effect is executed in the variation that reaches the play time. When the player operates the push button 31B while the second operation promotion display is displayed, an icon containing the words "Enter play time!!" informs that the play time has arrived. is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

(24) In the above embodiment, when a replay effect is being executed, the volume of the music of the music effect (hereinafter referred to as "music volume" as appropriate) is higher than the volume of the sound effect related to the replay video. (hereinafter referred to as "replay volume" as appropriate). However, this is not limited to this form, and even if the volume of the music in the music performance is not louder than the volume of the sound effect related to the replay video when the replay performance is being performed, good.

For example, the relationship between the music volume and the replay volume may be set according to patterns (A) to (D) shown below.
(A) Song volume > Replay volume (B) Song volume = Replay volume (C) Song volume < Replay volume

For example, the output volume, which is the volume of the sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, is determined based on the "basic volume" and "channel setting ratio" of the sound data. The output volume is a value obtained by multiplying the "basic volume" and the "channel setting ratio."

The channel setting ratio, which is the volume value specified for each channel, is set for each channel between the maximum volume "1", which is 100% of the standard output volume, and the total mute "0", which is 0%. Configurable.

In the case of (A), the channel setting ratio for the music volume may be set to "1 (100%)" while muting processing may be performed for the replay volume. In the mute process, by executing a process to set the channel setting ratio of the production sound being played back to "0 (0%)", a process is executed to set the output volume of the production sound being played back to "0". Ru. Note that while the mute is being executed, the output volume is "0", but the performance sound itself is being reproduced.

In the case of (A), while the channel setting ratio for the music volume is set to "1 (100%)", the mute processing is executed for the replay volume, but at a specific timing (for example, a chance-up effect in the replay video). The channel setting ratio for the replay volume may be set to "1 (100%)" at the timing when the replay volume is executed, etc.).

(25) In the above embodiment, in the second button performance, the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 displayed together with the images related to the push button 31B (second operation preview display, second operation promotion display) are The viewpoint is displayed at the same angle as the basic angle when looking down on the push button 31B while directly facing the game machine (game board) (see FIG. 9-42). However, not limited to this form, in the second button performance, the ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 displayed together with the image related to the push button 31B change the player's viewpoint from the gaming machine (gaming board). The push button 31B may be displayed at a different angle from the basic angle in which the push button 31B is viewed from above while facing directly.

For example, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 may be displayed in display patterns (A) to (D) shown below. The second button effect may be executed by combining any one of the display patterns (A) to (D).

(A) The ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 that are displayed together with the second operation preview display in the first mode are displayed with the player's viewpoint at the same angle as the first angle when looking down on the push button 31B from the upper right. Ru.

(B) The ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 that are displayed together with the second operation preview display in the second mode are viewed from an angle different from the first angle, and look down on the push button 31B from the upper right side of the player's viewpoint. The angle is displayed at the same angle as the second angle.

(C) The ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 displayed together with the second operation notice display in the third aspect are at different angles from the first angle and the second angle, and the player's viewpoint is The third angle is the same as the third angle in which the push button 31B is viewed from a position where the push button 31B is rotated about 90 degrees to the lower left with the axis perpendicular to the game machine (game board) as the rotation axis while facing directly against the game machine (game board). displayed at an angle of

(D) The ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 displayed together with the second operation promotion display are the fourth ally looking down on the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board). Displayed at the same angle as the angle.

(26) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second operation notice display moves from the top of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the bottom of the screen in the second button performance, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. In the second button effect, the second operation notice display may move in a direction different from the direction from the top of the screen of the image display device 5 to the bottom of the screen.

For example, in the second button presentation, a presentation may be performed in which the second operation notice display moves from the left part of the screen to the right part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second operation notice display moves from the left part of the screen to the right part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect of moving from the back of the screen toward the front of the screen as shown in No. 5 may be performed.

Further, in the second button effect, an effect in which the second operation notice display moves from the inside of the screen of the image display device 5 to the outside of the screen may be performed. For example, even if after the second operation preview display is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect of moving toward the push button 31B provided outside the screen of the image display device 5 is performed. good.

The feature section 03TM described above includes the following configurations.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
Display means (image display device 5),
The performance control means is
A suggestive effect (battle effect) indicating whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed on the display means,
In the aforementioned suggestive performance,
It is possible to place the first character (ally CA1) and the second character (enemy CA2) in positions facing each other,
It is possible to suggest that the first character is controlled to the advantageous state by winning the battle (victory effect),
It is possible to suggest that the second character will not be controlled to the advantageous state by winning the battle (defeat effect),
A first display that is an image of the first character viewed from the front side (a sixth battle image based on the inside first viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (11) etc.), and a first display that is an image of the first character viewed from the front side; After displaying the third display (eighth battle image based on the inner third viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (13) etc.) which is the image seen, and the first display, the third display is displayed. A second display that is an image in which neither the first character nor the second character is displayed (a seventh battle based on the inner second viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (12) etc.) image), and a fourth display (image) that can be displayed after displaying the third display and before displaying the first display, and is an image in which neither the first character nor the second character is displayed. 9-11 (14) etc., based on the inner fourth viewpoint) can be displayed.
After displaying the first display, the second display, the third display, and the fourth display, it is possible to suggest whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state (inner display). It is possible to announce the battle results after switching from the first viewpoint to the inner fourth viewpoint.)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, by displaying the first display, it becomes possible to visually recognize the detailed aspect of the first character, and by displaying the second display, it becomes possible to visually recognize the detailed aspect of the second character. It becomes possible to visually recognize.
Furthermore, by displaying the first display, the second display, the third display, and the fourth display, it gives the player a sense of realism as if he were between the first character and the second character. At the same time, it is possible to provide the player with an impressive effect image, and it is possible to improve the interest when suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
The gaming machine of means 1,
The effect control means simultaneously displays the first character and the second character in a first period of the suggestive effect (FIG. 9-9: SP Reach first half, FIG. 9-10: SP Reach second half first part). In the second period after the first period (Figure 9-14: SP Reach second half third part), either the first character or the second character won the battle. The feature is that it is possible to notify whether the

According to such a configuration, the first character and the second character are displayed simultaneously during the first period, thereby suggesting a battle between the characters and suggesting a relationship between the result of the battle and an advantageous state. can do.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
The gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The performance control means is
When the first display is displayed and when the third display is displayed, the suggesting performance can be executed at a performance progressing speed slower than the predetermined performance progressing speed (from the sixth battle image to the seventh battle image). Switching to the battle image, switching from the 8th battle image to the 9th battle image is relatively slow),
When the second display is displayed and when the fourth display is displayed, the suggested performance can be executed at a performance progressing speed faster than the predetermined performance progressing speed (from the seventh battle image to the seventh battle image). The switch to the 8th battle image and the switch from the 9th battle image to the 6th battle image are relatively quick)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, when the character is displayed, the performance progresses at a relatively slow speed, making it easy for the player to closely observe the appearance of the character, and when the character is not displayed, the performance progresses at a relatively fast speed. Therefore, when the screen switches to a screen where the character is displayed, the appearance of the character can be more impressive.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The performance control means is
Special display control for switching and displaying the first display, the second display, the third display, and the fourth display (a series of display switching control from a first inner viewpoint to a fourth inner viewpoint) can be executed multiple times,
It is possible to make the display switching cycle of the special display control executed later shorter than the display switching cycle of the special display control executed first (the display switching cycle can be set to 10 seconds, 9 seconds, or 5 seconds). , 2 seconds, then 1 second)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, even if the special display control is repeated multiple times, the display switching cycle of the later executed special display control is shortened, thereby creating a sense of speed in the screen change, and the special display It is possible to prevent the control from feeling monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
The gaming machine of means 4,
Equipped with operation means (push button 31B),
The performance control means is
It is possible to cause the display means to display an operation promotion display (operation promotion display BT1) that promotes operation of the operation means,
It is possible to execute the second special display control after the first special display control, and execute the third special display control after the second special display control (from the inside first viewpoint). A series of display switching controls up to the inner fourth viewpoint can be repeated multiple times).
A formation effect in which the operation promotion display is formed can be executed in a period corresponding to the second special display control and a period corresponding to the third special display control (the third display switching control period (Period: 5 seconds) to the 5th display switching control period (cycle: 1 second), it is possible to execute a normal button effect in which the operation promotion display BT1 is formed in stages)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, the operation promotion display is formed in stages in response to the shortening of the display switching cycle of the special display control. The player's interest in the promotion display can be increased, and the player's interest can be efficiently improved by the forming effect executed in parallel with the special display control executed multiple times.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
The gaming machine of means 5,
The performance control means is
When the third special display control is executed (when the fifth display switching control (period: 1 second) is completed), the first character is displayed in the first area of the display means (the screen ally CA1 is displayed in the upper left area), the second character is displayed in the second area (enemy CA2 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen), and the operation promotion display is displayed in the third area (the operation promotion display is displayed in the center area of the screen). The operation promotion display BT1 can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display area of the display means can be effectively utilized to further enliven the battle between the characters.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
The gaming machine of means 2,
The performance control means is capable of executing a special performance (whiteout performance) when the suggested performance transitions from the first period (SP reach second half first part) to the second period (SP reach second half second part). It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since the special performance once shifts the player's attention from the character to the special performance and then shifts to the second period of the suggestive performance, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the suggestive performance multiple times. , can liven up the second period.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
Display means (image display device 5);
A movable body (movable body YM),
The movable body is movable from a first position (retracted position) to a second position (advanced position) that is a position that covers the display means more than the first position,
The performance control means is
A predetermined image (SP reach effect image) can be displayed on the display means as a suggestive effect image suggesting whether or not the control will be controlled to the advantageous state;
When a specific scene of the predetermined video is displayed, the movable body can be moved from the first position to the second position (third chance up effect of the second part of the second half of SP reach). When the production video is displayed, the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position to the advance position),
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled in the suggestion effect, a specific video including at least the specific scene can be displayed when the control is controlled to the advantageous state (during the jackpot round period, SP reach We are displaying a replay video including a production video of the third chance up production in the second part of the second half),
When the specific scene is displayed in the specific video, the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position is restricted (production of the third chance up production in the second half of SP reach) Do not move the movable body YM from the retreat position to the advance position when the replay video including the video is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, after it is reported that the suggestive performance will be controlled to an advantageous state, when the control is controlled to be advantageous, the display means displays a specific video including at least a specific scene, thereby making it possible to display an advantageous state. The player's need to see the specific scene again when controlled by the state can be satisfied, and the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific scene is displayed in the specific video. By restricting this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display means from being reduced and improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
The gaming machine of means 8,
Equipped with sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
The production control means generates music video (video (A), video (B), video (C) of music video performance) related to the music performance in which the music is played back and output from the sound output means as the video in the advantageous state. ), the specific video, and a preview video related to a preview performance that foretells that the specific video will be displayed (a replay preview display of a replay preview performance).

According to such a configuration, by displaying a specific scene when being controlled to an advantageous state even when being controlled to an advantageous state different from the suggestion effect, the specific scene when being controlled to an advantageous state is displayed. It is possible to satisfy the needs of the player who wants to see the game again, and it is also possible to increase the variation of performance when controlled to be in an advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
The gaming machine of means 8 or 9,
The advantageous conditions include a first advantageous condition (3R jackpot) and a second advantageous condition (10R jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous condition,
The performance control means is
When controlled to be in the first advantageous state, restricting display of the specific video as the video in the advantageous state (restricting execution of replay effect at the time of 3R jackpot);
When controlled to the second advantageous state, the specific video can be displayed as the video of the advantageous state (replay performance is executed when a 10R jackpot is achieved).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when controlled to the second advantageous state, the specific image can be displayed as the image of the advantageous state, so that the second advantageous state feels more special than the first advantageous state. At the same time, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the types of advantageous states, thereby increasing the interest of the game in advantageous states.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 10,
The performance control means is capable of executing a special performance (chance-up performance) when the suggestion performance is being executed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the special performance is performed than when the special performance is not performed,
The performance control means is
A special performance video related to the special performance can be displayed on the display means as the predetermined video (a performance video related to a chance-up performance can be displayed as a SP reach performance video),
Restricting the display of the special effect video in the specific video (in the replay video, restricting the display of the effect video related to the chance-up effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by restricting the display of the special effect image in the specific image, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not to display the special effect image for the specific image, and the process of determining whether or not to display the special effect image for the specific image can be omitted. Processing burden can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 11,
The performance control means is capable of displaying the specific video from the beginning when the display of the specific video ends before the end of the advantageous state (if the replay video ends during the jackpot game state, it is possible to display the specific video again from the beginning). (Display replay video from)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the display of the specific video ends before the end of the advantageous state, the specific video can be displayed from the beginning, so that irregular situations can be prevented when the advantageous state is controlled. When this occurs, it is possible to smoothly advance the performance regarding a specific video, and to prevent players from being confused.

The gaming machine of means 13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 12,
The predetermined videos include a first predetermined video (a production video of the first part of the second half of SP Reach), and a second predetermined video (the second and third parts of the second half of SP Reach) that is displayed after the first predetermined video. ) and,
The specific video includes a first specific video (replay video of Capter 2) corresponding to the first predetermined video, and a second specific video (replay video of Capter 3) corresponding to the second predetermined video,
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, the player can select at least one of the first specific video and the second specific video as the specific video (during the replay video selection period, the player can select at least one of the first specific video and the second specific video). A replay video selection icon is displayed on the left side of the screen of the display device 5, a replay video selection promotion display BT1 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the player operates the push button 31B, the replay video icon is displayed. (Determine the corresponding chapter as the replay video)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the player can select at least one of the first specific video or the second specific video as the specific video, thereby increasing the advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the period for displaying a specific image in a state from running out, and the player can select any specific image, which allows the specific image to be displayed more effectively, which is advantageous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game in this state.

The gaming machine of means 14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 13,
The performance control means is
It is possible to display a specific scene from the predetermined video (the second part of the second half of SP reach is displayed),
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a specific video including at least the specific scene of the predetermined video can be displayed as the video in the advantageous state. (Displaying replay video including)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by displaying the specific video including at least the specific scene on the display means, it is possible to satisfy the player's need to rewatch the specific scene when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and A specific image can be displayed more effectively, and the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 15 is:
The gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 14,
comprising variable display means for variable display of special identification information;
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (the display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit"), it can be controlled to the advantageous state;
The performance control means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied is the specific display result when controlled to be in the advantageous state (a jackpot round). It is possible to perform image retention series during the period)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the control is in an advantageous state, it is suggested that the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied is the specific display result, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise. The specific image can be displayed more effectively, and the interest of the game in an advantageous state can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Variable display means (CPU 103, performance control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols);
Variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of controlling a first state (open state) into which game media can enter and a second state (closed state) into which game media are more difficult to enter than the first state. and,
Round game control means (round game control means) for executing a round game (jackpot round game) in which the variable means is controlled from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when controlled to the advantageous state; CPU103) and
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
Display means (image display device 5);
Light emitting means (attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9),
The performance control means is
In the round game, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light based on the game medium entering the variable means (in the jackpot round game, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light based on the fact that the game medium enters the variable means) Based on this, execute the attacker lamp lighting effect),
In the round game, it is possible to indicate the number of entries of the game medium into the variable means by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (in the jackpot round game, according to the count value of the jackpot round prize winning counter, The appearance of the attacker lamp lighting is different),
In the round game, it is possible to limit suggesting the number of entries using the display means, and use the display means to execute a special effect corresponding to the advantageous state (in the jackpot round game, the image display device (On the screen of 5, the execution of the production that notifies the detection of the winning of a game ball in the grand prize opening is restricted, and the music video production and round number display production are executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by restricting the use of the display means to suggest the number of entries and using the light emitting means to suggest the number of entries, the visibility of the special effect being performed on the display means is reduced. It is possible to prevent this from happening and improve the interest of the game in an advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
The gaming machine of means 16,
The performance control means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in accordance with the number of entries (when detecting winning of the first to third game balls to the big winning hole, changes the attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L3 to orange). When the 4th to 6th game balls are detected to have entered the grand prize opening, the attacker lamps 77L4 to 77L6 are caused to emit pink light, and the 7th to 9th game balls have entered the grand prize opening. When detecting, the attacker lamps 77L7 to 77L9 are made to emit red light, and when the winning of the 10th game ball to the grand prize opening is detected, the attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9 are made to emit rainbow color)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in accordance with the number of entries, it is possible to attract attention to the light emitting means, thereby increasing the interest of the game in the advantageous state. can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
The gaming machine of means 16 or 17,
comprising variable display means for variable display of special identification information;
controllable to the advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result;
The effect control means executes a predetermined effect (emission hold continuous effect) that suggests that the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied is the specific display result when the effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It is possible and
The effect control means is capable of executing the predetermined effect by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a specific manner (capable of executing a light emitting hold continuous effect that causes the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 to emit light in a rainbow color).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in addition to the number of entering game media, the light emitting means can indicate that the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied is the specific display result, and the player can It is possible to provide surprise and improve the interest of the game in an advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of means 19 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 18,
The round game control means is capable of setting the number of game media that can enter when controlling the variable means to the first state in the round game to a predetermined number (10),
The performance control means is
When the variable means is controlled to the first state in the round game, it is possible to execute an excessive entry performance (over-winning performance) that notifies when a number of the game media larger than the predetermined number enters. and
By causing the light emitting means to emit light in a first special mode, it is possible to perform the excessive winning effect. )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to notify the number of game media that have entered in the light emitting means, it is also possible to make the player recognize that a number of game media that are larger than a predetermined number have entered, and to prevent the player from entering in an advantageous state. It can improve the interest of playing games.

The gaming machine of means 20 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 19,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (the display result of the second special symbol is "small win"), it can be controlled to a special state (small win game state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state (jackpot game state) can be controlled based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) while being controlled in the special state;
When the performance control means is controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a specific performance (attacker lamp V winning notification performance) for notifying when the game medium passes through the specific area,
The specific performance can be executed by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a second special mode (attacker lamp V winning notification performance by causing the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit strong orange light)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to notify the number of entering game media in the light emitting means, it is also possible to make the player recognize that the game media has passed through the specific area, and also to make the player recognize that the game media has passed through the specific area. It is possible to prevent a situation where the player is not allowed to pass, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

The gaming machine of means 21 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 20,
The performance control means is
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, a recovery display (a recovery display including the words "power is being restored") can be displayed on the display means,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the gaming machine is controlled in the advantageous state and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the recovery display is displayed on the display means. Making it difficult to visually recognize images corresponding to advantageous conditions (when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game state and the power is restored, a recovery display that has a higher display priority than performance images related to the jackpot round performance) ),
When displaying the recovery display on the display means, it is possible to indicate the number of entries by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Depending on the count value, the effect mode of the attacker lamp lighting effect is changed and the attacker lamp is emitted)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the recovery display is displayed on the display means, the number of entries is indicated by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, so that when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, an advantageous state can be realized. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player that the system is being controlled, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 21,
The performance control means is capable of executing special performances (first chance-up performance to fourth chance-up performance) when the suggestion performance is being executed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the special performance is performed than when the special performance is not performed,
The special performances include a first special performance (a third chance up performance in a chance mode) and a second special performance (a third chance in a super hot mode) that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first special performance. There is a close-up effect) and
The performance control means is
The number of executions of the special effect can be indicated by the light emission mode of the light emitting means (one attacker lamp is emitted each time the chance-up effect is executed),
When the special performance is executed, it is possible to indicate which special performance, the first special performance or the second special performance, has been performed by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (chance mode). When the 3rd chance up effect is executed, the chance up related light emitting effect (low expectation mode) that causes the attacker lamp to emit white light is executed, and when the 3rd chance up effect in the intense mode is executed, the attacker lamp A lighting effect related to increasing the chance of emitting red light (high expectation mode) is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the number of executions of the special performance and the type of the executed special performance are suggested in the light emitting means, so that the player has a high probability that the suggested performance will be controlled in an advantageous state. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is true, and the interest of the suggestive presentation can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 23 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player;
Display means (image display device 5),
The performance control means is
Suggestive effects (SP reach) that suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled can be executed on the display means,
When the suggestive effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) that displays an image related to the operation means can be executed;
The operation-related performances include a first operation-related performance (first button performance), and a second operation-related performance (second button performance) that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related performance; There is,
The performance control means is
In the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is a first angle of the operation means, which is an angle when the operation means is viewed from the front side and is an angle at which the entire operation means can be visually recognized. (The basic angle of looking down on the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board)) The first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed. can be,
In the second operation-related production, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at a second angle different from the first angle (a first angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right). An image that is displayed at a certain second display (the second operation preview display of the first mode) and at a third angle (a second angle that is different from the first angle and is a bird's-eye view of the push button 31B from the upper right). a third display (second operation promotion display of the second aspect); and a fourth display (second operation promotion display) that is an image that displays the operating means at the first angle and is different from the first display. display) and can display
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (the first display). When the one-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the fourth display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the operation of the operation means (the fourth display). When the 2-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the first operation-related performance that has a lower rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the second operation-related performance, the image related to the operating means is displayed by displaying the operating means at one type of angle. On the other hand, in the second operation-related presentation, which is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operating means is an image in which the operating means is displayed from multiple types of angles. By doing so, it is possible to create a more special feeling in the second operation-related performance than in the first operation-related performance, and it is possible to improve the interest in the suggestion performance in which the operation-related performance is performed.

The gaming machine of means 24 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player;
Display means (image display device 5),
The performance control means is
Suggestive effects (SP reach) that suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled can be executed on the display means,
When the suggestive effect is being executed, a specific display (a notice telop of the third chance up effect) can be displayed,
The specific displays include a first specific display (white notice telop) that is displayed in a predetermined color, and a second specific display that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific display and is displayed in a specific color. (Golden notice telop)
When the suggestive effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) that displays an image related to the operation means can be executed;
The operation-related performances include a first operation-related performance (first button performance), and a second operation-related performance (second button performance) that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related performance; There is,
The performance control means is
In the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is a first angle of the operation means, which is an angle when the operation means is viewed from the front side and is an angle at which the entire operation means can be visually recognized. (The basic angle of looking down on the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board)) The first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed. can be,
In the second operation-related production, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at a second angle different from the first angle (a first angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right). a second display (second operation preview display of the first aspect); and a third display (second operation prompt display) that is an image that displays the operating means at the first angle and is different from the first display. display) and can display
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (the first display). When the one-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the third display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the operation of the operation means (a third display). When the 2-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player),
The background image (special background image BI) used when the second operation-related effect is executed is composed of a plurality of colors (gold, black) including at least a color similar to the specific color, and among the plurality of colors, the specific color Similar colors account for the highest percentage (in special background images, gold: about 80%, black: about 20%)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, a color similar to the specific color among a plurality of colors including at least a color similar to the specific color indicating that the second operation-related effect is to be controlled in an advantageous state is used as a background image when the second operation-related effect is executed. By having the highest proportion, it is possible to make the second operation-related performance feel more special than the first operation-related performance, and it is also possible to easily recognize that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high. , it is possible to make the player anticipate an advantageous development after the operation-related performance.

The gaming machine of means 25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player;
Display means (image display device 5),
The operation means includes an operation part (operation effective part) that can be operated by the player and a non-operation part (operation ineffective part) that cannot be operated by the player,
The performance control means is
A suggestion effect (SP reach) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state using a specific character (ally character CA1) can be executed on the display means,
When the suggestive effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) that displays an image related to the operation means can be executed;
The operation-related performances include a first operation-related performance (first button performance), and a second operation-related performance (second button performance) that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related performance; There is,
The performance control means is
In the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is a first angle of the operation means, which is an angle when the operation means is viewed from the front side and is an angle at which the entire operation means can be visually recognized. (The basic angle of looking down on the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board)) The first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed. can be,
In the second operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at a second angle different from the first angle (a second angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right). a second display (second operation preview display of the second aspect); and a third display (second operation promotion display) that is an image that displays the operating means at the first angle and is different from the first display. display) and can display
In the first display, the specific character is not displayed (the ally character CA1 is not displayed in the first operation promotion display),
In the second display, the specific character is displayed on an image related to the operation part among the images related to the operation means (ally character CA1 is displayed in the operation effective part of the second operation preview display of the second aspect) ),
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (the first display). When the one-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the third display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the operation of the operation means. When the 2-operation promotion display is displayed, an effect is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the second operation-related effect is executed, by displaying the specific character in the image related to the operation unit among the images related to the operation means, the second operation-related effect is displayed more effectively than the first operation-related effect. 2 It is possible to give a special feeling to the performance related to the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestion performance in which the performance related to the operation is executed.

The gaming machine of means 26 is
The gaming machine of means 23,
The performance control means, in the second operation-related performance, displays the second display (the second operation preview display of the first aspect) and the third display (of the second aspect) that has higher visibility than the second display. After sequentially displaying the second operation notice display) and the fourth display (second operation promotion display), which has higher visibility than the third display, the operation means is operated. It is possible to suggest whether or not the game will be controlled in an advantageous state (based on the push button 31B being operated by the player, an effect that notifies the display result is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by gradually improving the visibility of the images related to the operating means, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the images related to the operating means, and also to increase the visibility of the images related to the operating means to be displayed next. It is possible to attract interest in the image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive performance in which the second operation-related performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means 27 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 26,
The effect control means can display on the display means a special display (blackout image BO) that reduces the visibility of the image that was displayed immediately before the image related to the operation means is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, before the image related to the operating means is displayed, a special display that reduces the visibility of the image that was displayed immediately before is displayed, so that the image related to the operating means is displayed. This can be further emphasized, and the interest of the suggestive presentation in which images related to the operating means are displayed can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 28 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 27,
Equipped with sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
The performance control means, in the second operation related performance,
It is possible to output a specific sound (sound effect) from the sound output means,
When an image related to the operating means is displayed, when the angle at which the operating means is viewed changes, it is possible to emphasize the pitch (key) of the specific sound (second aspect of the first aspect). (The key of the sound effect becomes higher in the order of operation preview display, second operation notice display of the second mode, and second operation promotion display)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by increasing the pitch of the specific sound step by step, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image related to the operating means, and also to increase the player's interest in the next displayed image. , and the interest of the suggestive performance in which the second operation-related performance is executed can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 29 is
The gaming machine of means 23,
The performance control means is
Executing a suggestion effect indicating whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state using a specific character (ally character CA1) in the display means;
In the first operation-related production, when the first display is displayed, characters including at least the specific character are restricted from being displayed (when the first operation promotion display is displayed, the ally character CA1 is without displaying the first operation promotion effect display),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the fourth display is displayed, characters including at least the specific character can be displayed (when the second operation promotion display is displayed, the ally character CA1 and the second Display ally character CA3)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, displaying characters including at least the specific character is restricted, and in the second operation-related presentation, the fourth display is restricted. By displaying characters that include at least the specific character when displayed, it is possible to give a more special feeling to the second operation-related performance than the first operation-related performance, and to suggest that the operation-related performance will be executed. It can improve the interest of the performance.

The gaming machine of means 30 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 29,
Equipped with special light emitting means (light guide plate),
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the special light-emitting means emits light in a specific light-emitting mode (a light-guide plate light-emitting effect in which the light guide plate emits rainbow-colored light),
When notifying that the operating means is controlled to be in the advantageous state based on the operation, a pseudo light emitting effect is performed that does not use the special light emitting means and corresponds to the light emitting effect. It is possible to perform (simulating a light guide plate light emitting effect in which the light guide plate emits rainbow colors when the display result indicates a "jackpot" based on the push button 31B being operated by the player. It is possible to perform the pseudo light guide plate light emission effect on the screen of the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, a pseudo light emitting effect corresponding to the light emitting effect is executed without using the special light emitting means, and thereby the light emitting effect using the special light emitting means, which is difficult to install due to cost and space, can be performed. A pseudo light-emission performance corresponding to the performance can be executed without using a special light-emission means, and the interest when controlled to an advantageous state can be improved in the same way as a game machine equipped with a special light-emission means.

The gaming machine of means 31 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 30,
The performance control means starts the operation-related performance and ends the operation-related performance while executing the suggestive performance (button performance (first button performance, second button performance) during SP reach. start/end)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by interrupting the suggestion performance, and by restarting the suggestion performance after the end of the operation-related performance, the player is given a sense of surprise that has not been executed so far. It is possible to make the user recognize the performance that has been given, and it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from suddenly starting.

The gaming machine of means 32 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 31,
The suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (normal reach) and a second suggestion performance (SP reach) that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestion performance,
The performance control means restricts execution of the operation-related performance when the first suggested performance is executed (in step S03TM3010 of the variation start performance determination process, the variation pattern is not a variation pattern with super reach). (i.e., when the variation pattern is "normal reach"), the process of determining the performance type of the button performance in step S03TM3060 is skipped, so the button performance is not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the first suggestion performance that has a lower rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the second suggestion performance, the execution of the operation-related performance is restricted, so that the first suggestion performance with a short execution period is It is possible to prevent the delay from being delayed, and to make the second suggestion effect even more prominent.

The gaming machine of means 33 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 32,
The performance control means, in the operation-related performance,
It is possible to move an image associated with the operating means from a first position (top of the screen) to a second position (bottom of the screen),
When the image related to the operating means is being moved from the first position to the second position, the angle from which the operating means is viewed is switched to display the image related to the operating means (in the first aspect). The second operation notice display, the second operation notice display in the second mode, the second operation notice display in the third mode, and the second operation promotion display move from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen, and are displayed while switching angles. )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by moving the image related to the operating means, it is possible to give a special feeling to the operation-related performance, and to make the player understand that the operation-related performance in which the image related to the operating means does not move is different from the operation-related performance. It is possible to make the user recognize that it is a different operation-related performance, and to create a sense of expectation for the display result of the variable display that is notified after the operation-related performance.

The gaming machine of means 34 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 33,
The image related to the operating means is a three-dimensional image imitating the operating means (the second operation preview display and the second operation promotion display are three-dimensional images imitating the push button 31B),
The performance control means is
Images related to the operation means (second operation preview display, second operation promotion display),
It can be displayed in a static mode in which no movement is performed and a movement mode in which a motion is performed unlike the static mode (it can be displayed in a non-motion mode and a movement mode),
It can be displayed in a predetermined mode in which it is displayed in a predetermined color and in a non-predetermined mode in which it is not displayed in the predetermined color (it can be displayed in a mode in which it emits gold light and a mode in which it does not emit gold light);
When the operation of the operation means is not enabled, an image related to the operation means can be displayed in a static mode and a non-predetermined mode (a second image when the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled); The operation notice display is displayed in a state in which no operation is taking place, and in a state in which no golden light is emitted).
When the operation of the operation means is enabled, an image related to the operation means can be displayed in an operation mode and a predetermined mode (a second operation when the operation of the push button 31B is enabled). The promotion display is displayed in a state in which the action is being performed and in a state in which the object is emitting gold light)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, since the image related to the operating means is a three-dimensional image imitating the operating means, the presentation effect when displaying the image related to the operating means from a plurality of different angles is improved. When the operation of the operation means is enabled, the player can be informed that the operation of the operation means is enabled by displaying an image related to the operation means in the operation mode and a predetermined mode. can be clearly shown.

The gaming machine of means 35 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 34,
The effect control means is capable of causing the operation means to emit light when notifying that the operation means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the operation of the operation means, and operating the operation means. (When a victory effect is executed based on the push button 31B being operated by the player, the push button 31B vibrates and emits rainbow-colored light.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by the operation means emitting light, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the operation of the operation means is enabled, and by operating the operation means, the control can be controlled to an advantageous state. It can improve the interest when being played.

The gaming machine of means 36 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 35,
The execution period of the second operation-related effect is longer than the execution period of the first operation-related effect (as shown in FIG. 9-39, the execution period of the first button effect is from T18 to T31). (As shown in Figure 9-41, the execution period of the second button effect is the period from T14 to T31)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the second operation-related performance can be executed for a longer period than the first operation-related performance, thereby improving the interest when the player is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 37 is
The gaming machine of means 23,
The first angle is an angle at which the player can view the operating means,
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the second angle and the third angle is an angle at which it is difficult for the player to see the operating means (an angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the back side).

According to such a configuration, by displaying images related to the operating means from a plurality of different angles including angles at which it is difficult for the player to view the operating means, the second operation-related presentation is more effective than the first operation-related presentation. A special feeling can be given to the performance, and the interest in the suggestive performance in which the operation-related performance is executed can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 38 is
The gaming machine of means 23,
In the first operation-related production, before the first display is displayed, the operation of the operation means is not enabled (the first operation preview display indicates that the operation is not enabled),
In the second operation-related presentation, the operation of the operating means is not enabled before the fourth display is displayed (the second operation preview display indicates that the operation is not enabled).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the first operation-related performance, the operation of the operating means becomes effective before the first display is displayed, which reduces the performance effect of the first operation-related performance. It is possible to prevent the operation of the operating means from becoming effective before the fourth display is displayed in the second operation-related performance, thereby preventing the performance effect of the second operation-related performance from being degraded.

The gaming machine of means 39 is
The gaming machine of means 23,
The effect control means is capable of displaying a specific display (notice telop) when the suggestive effect is being executed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific display is displayed than when the specific display is not displayed,
The specific display includes a first specific display (white notice telop) that is displayed in a predetermined color, and a second display that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific display and is displayed in a specific color. (Golden notice telop)
The background image (special background image BI) used when the second operation-related effect is executed is composed of a plurality of colors (gold, black) including at least a color similar to the specific color, and among the plurality of colors, the specific color Similar colors account for the highest percentage (in special background images, gold: about 80%, black: about 20%)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, a color similar to the specific color among a plurality of colors including at least a color similar to the specific color indicating that the second operation-related effect is to be controlled in an advantageous state is used as a background image when the second operation-related effect is executed. By having the highest proportion, it is possible to make the second operation-related performance feel more special than the first operation-related performance, and it is also possible to easily recognize that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high. , it is possible to make the player anticipate an advantageous development after the operation-related performance.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance control means for performing the performance;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means;
The operating means includes an operating section that can be operated by the player and a non-operating section that cannot be operated by the player,
The performance control means is
The display means can execute a suggestive effect indicating whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state using a specific character,
When the suggestive effect is being executed, an operation-related effect that displays an image related to the operating means can be executed;
The operation-related performance includes a first operation-related performance and a second operation-related performance that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related performance,
The performance control means is
In the first operation-related presentation, the image related to the operation means is a first angle of the operation means, which is an angle when the operation means is viewed from the front side and is an angle at which the entire operation means can be visually recognized. It is possible to display a first display, which is an image displayed in
In the second operation-related production, as an image related to the operation means, a second display is an image that displays the operation means at a second angle different from the first angle; a third display, which is an image to be displayed and which is different from the first display;
In the first display, the specific character is not displayed;
in the second display, displaying the specific character on an image related to the operating section among images related to the operating means;
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means,
In the second operation-related presentation, when the third display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine with special features.

Images